巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Panthāna: {'def': '(for saṇṭhāna) at SnA 20: see saṇṭhāna 3. (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panti: {'def': '(f.) [Ved. paṅkti set or row of five, group in general] a row, range, line Vism.392 (tisso sopāna-pantiyo); DhA.III,219 (uddhana°); ThA.72 (satta pantiyo); VvA.198 (amba°). (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】排、行列、行(a row, range, line)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Panudana: {'def': 'panūdana【中】移掉，驱散，拒绝(removal, dispelling, rejection)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Panudati: {'def': '[pa+nudati] to dispel, repel, remove, push away S.I, 167 sq., 173; Dh.383; Sn.81, 928 (pot. panudeyya or metri causa panūdeyya=pajaheyya etc. Nd¹ 385); J.VI,491 (1. pl. panudāmase). -- ger. panuditvā SnA 591, & panujja Sn.359, 535, 1055 (expl^d at Nd² 395 as imper. pres.=pajaha, cp. SnA 591=panudehi); J.III,14; V,198 (=pātetvā C.). -- Fut. panudahissati Th.1, 27, 233. -- Pass. panujjati, ppr. panujjamāna in phrase “api panujjamānena pi” even if repulsed M.I,108, cp. A.IV,32 & Nett 164 (v. l. to be substituted for T. pamajjamānena). -- pp. panunna & panudita (q. v.). (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+nud +a) 驱散、除去、推掉(dispels, removes, pushes away)。【过】panudi。【过分】panudita。【独】panuditvā, panudiya。【现分】panudamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Panudita: {'def': '[pp. of panudati] dispelled, driven out Sn.483 (panūdita metri causa, v. l. panudita). See also panunna. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panunna: {'def': '(Paṇunna & Panuṇṇa) [pp. of panudati] (med. & pass.) put away, rejected or rejecting, dispelled, driven away, sent A.II,29; V,31; Sn.469 (°kodha); J.VI,247, 285; Kvu 597 (ito p., trsl^d “ending here”).

--paccekasacca one who has rejected each of the four false truths (the 5^th of the 10 noble states, ariyavāsā: see Vin. Texts I.141) D.III,269, 270; A.II,41; V,29 sq. (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panāda: {'def': '[pa+nāda] shouting out, shrieks of joy J.VI,282. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panādeti: {'def': '[Caus. of pa+nad] to shout out, to utter a sound Th.1, 310. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panāḷikā: {'def': '【阴】管，沟，水道(a pipe, tube, channel, water course)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. panāḷī] a pipe, tube, channel, water course DA.I,244. (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panāḷī: {'def': '(f.) [pa+nāḷī] a tube, pipe A.IV,171 (udapāna°). (Page 411)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Panūdana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. panudati] removal, dispelling, rejection Sn.252 (sabba-dukkhâpanūdana SnA 293 should be read as sabba-dukkha-apanūdana, as at Vin.II,148=J.I,94), 1106 (=pahānaṁ etc. Nd² 396). (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Papa: {'def': '(nt.) [see pibati, pānīya etc. of pā] water J.I,109 (āpaṁ papaṁ mahodakan ti attho). The word is evidently an etym. construction. See also papā. (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Papaccati: {'def': '[Pass. of pa+pacati] to be cooked, to become ripe PvA.55 (°itvā). (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Papada: {'def': '(or Papadā?) [pa+pada] tip of the foot. toes; but in diff. meaning (for papaṭā or papāta to pat) “falling down, abyss, pit” at Sn.665 (gloss for papaṭa; expl^d at SnA 479 by “mahāniraya”). (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】脚端。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Papatana: {'def': '【中】跌倒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+pat] falling down Sn.576=J.IV,127 (Abl. papatanā papatanato C.). (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Papatati: {'def': '[pa+patati] to fall forward, to fall down, off or from, to fall into (Acc.) Vin.II,284; M.I,79, 80; S.I,48 (visame magge), 187 (=Th.1, 1220 patanti); 100, II.114; V,47; Dh.336; J.V,31; Pv.I,10¹² (nirayaṁ papatiss’ahaṁ, cp. PvA.52; v. l. SS niray’ûpapatiss’âhaṁ). -- aor. papatā Vin.III,17, cp. II.126; J.VI,566. See also patati. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+pat落下+a), 跌倒，跌落，跌入。【过】papati。【过分】papatita。【独】papatitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Papañca: {'def': '[in its P. meaning uncertain whether identical with Sk. prapañca (pra+pañc to spread out; meaning “expansion, diffuseness, manifoldedness”; cp. papañceti & papañca 3) more likely, as suggested by etym. & meaning of Lat. im-ped-iment-um, connected with pada, thus perhaps originally “pa-pad-ya,” i. e. what is in front of (i. e. in the way of) the feet (as an obstacle)] 1. obstacle, impediment, a burden which causes delay, hindrance, delay DhA.I,18; II,91 (kathā°). °ṁ karoti to delay, to tarry J.IV,145; °ṁ akatvā without delay J.I,260; VI,392. -- ati° too great a delay J.I,64; II,92. -- 2. illusion, obsession, hindrance to spiritual progress M.I,65; S.I,100; IV,52, 71; A.II,161 sq.; III,393 sq.; Sn.530 (=taṇhā-diṭṭhi-mānabheda-p. SnA 431; and generally in Commentaries so resolved, without verbal analysis); Ud.77 (as f. papañcā); Th.1, 519, 902, 989 (cp. Brethren 344, 345 & J.R.A.S. 1906, 246 sq.; Neumann trsl^s “Sonderheit,” see Lieder p. 210, 211 & Mittlere Sammlung I.119 in trsl. of M.I,65 nippapañca); Dh.195, 254 (°âbhiratā pajā, nippapañcā Tathāgatā; =taṇhādisu p° esu abhiratā DhA.III,378); J.I,9; Pv IV.1³⁴ (=taṇh’--ādi-p. PvA.230); Nett 37, 38; SnA 495 (gihi). -- nippapañca (q. v.) without obsession. ‹-› 3. diffuseness, copiousness SnA 40.

--saṅkhā sign or characteristic of obsession Sn.874 (cp. SnA 553; =taṇhā° diṭṭhi° and māna° Nd¹ 280), 916 (=avijjādayo kilesā mūlaṁ SnA 562). --saññā (°saṅkhā) idea of obsession, idée fixe, illusion D.II,277 (cp. Dial II.312); M.I,109, 112, 271, 383; S.IV,71. (Page 412)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】障碍(an obstacle)，妨碍(impediment)，延迟(delay)，错觉(illusion)，修行的妨害(hindrance to spiritual progress)。papañcasaññā﹐妄想。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Papañca-sūdanī: {'def': 'f. 中部經的注釋 MA.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'f. 中部経の注釈 MA.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Papañceti: {'def': '[denom. fr. papañca] 1. to have illusions, to imagine, to be obsessed M.I,112; DhA.I,198 (tesaṁ suvaṇṇa-lobhena papañcentānaṁ). -- 2. to be profuse. to talk much, to delay on SnA 136. -- pp. papañcita. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+pac+e) 解释，延迟。【过】papañcesi。【过分】papañcita。【独】papañcetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Papañcita: {'def': '[pp. of papañceti] obsessed, illusioned SnA 495 (a° gihipapañ-cena). -- nt. obsession, vain imagination, illusion S.IV,203≈Vbh.390. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Papaṭikā: {'def': '【阴】乾树皮(the outer dry bark)、树的硬皮(crust of a tree)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. prapāṭikā (lexic. & gram.) young shoot, sprout; and parpharīka (RV.) one who tears to pieces; also Sk. parpaṭa N. of a plant] 1. a splinter, piece, fragment, chip Vin.II,193 (read tato pap.°); A.IV,70 sq. (of ayophāla); J.V,333 (same as Vin passage); Miln.179. -- 2. the outer dry bark or crust of a tree, falling off in shreads; also shoots, sprouts M.I,78, 192 sq., 488; A.I,152; III,19 sq., 44, 200, 360; IV,99, 336; V,4 sq., 314 sq.; J.III,491. Cp. pheggu. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Papaṭā: {'def': '(papatā) (f.) [fr. papāta? Cp. papaṭikā] a broken-off piece, splinter, fragment; also proclivity, precipice, pit (?) S.II,227 (papatā ti kho lābha-sakkāra-silokass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ; cp. S.III,109: sobbho papāto kodh’ûpāyāsass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ); So 665 (=sobbha SnA 479; gloss papada). See also pappaṭaka. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Papitāmaha: {'def': '[pa+pitāmaha] a paternal great-grandfather Dāvs III,29. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】内祖父(paternal great-grandfather.父系的祖父)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pappaṭaka: {'def': '【阳】蕈、香菇(a mushroom)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[etym. uncertain] 1. a broken bit, splinter, small stone (?) (Rh. D. in Dial. III,83 “outgrowth”) D.III,87 (bhūmi °ṁ paribhuñjati); Vism.418 (≈), Nett 227 (Com.) (°ojaṁ khādāpento). --2. a water plant: see paṇṇaka 2; cp, also papaṭikā² & Sk. parpaṭa N. of medicinal plant. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Papphāsa: {'def': '【阳】肺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. sound-root * phu, not corresponding directly to Sk. pupphusa (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 34), to which it stands in a similar relation as *ghur (P.) to *ghar (Sk.) or phurati›pharati. From same root Gr. fusάw to blow and Lat. pustula bubble, blister; see Walde under pustula] the lungs D.II,293; M.I,185, 421; III,90; Sn.195=J.I,146; Kh III, (cp. KhA 56); Miln.26. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pappoti: {'def': '[the contracted form of pāpuṇāti, Sk. prāpnoti] to obtain, get, gain, receive, attain D.III,159, 165; Sn.185, 187, 584; Dh.27; DhA.I,395. -- Pot. 1^st pl. pappomu J.V,57 (=pāpuṇeyyāma C.). -- ger. pappuyya S.I,48; Sn.482 (or pot?), 593, 829 (=pāpuṇitvā Nd¹ 170). -- For further ref. see pāpuṇāti. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+ap+o)﹐到达，获得，达到。【独】pappuyya。【不】pappotuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pappoṭheti: {'def': '(pa+poth+e), 拍打(flaps)，打(beats)。【过】pappoṭhesi。【过分】pappoṭhita。【独】pappoṭhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+poṭheti; sometimes spelt papphoṭeti] to strike, knock, beat, flap (of wings) Vin.I,48; II,208, 217; M.I,333 (papph°); J.II,153 (pakkhe); III,175 (papoṭh°= sañcuṇṇeti C.); Miln.368 (papph°); DA.I,7; Vism.283 (pph). (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Papupphaka: {'def': '(adj.) [pa+pupphaka] “with flowers in front,” flower-tipped (of the arrows of Māra) Dh.46 (but expl^d at DhA.I,337 as “p.°saṅkhātāni tebhūmakāni vaṭṭāni,” i. e. existence in the 3 stages of being). (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paputta: {'def': '[pa+putta, cp. Sk. praputra (BR.: “doubtful”) Inscr.] a grandson J.VI,477. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】孙子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Papā: {'def': '(f.) [Ved. prapā, pa+pā] a place for supplying water, a shed by the roadside to provide travellers with water, a well, cistern D.III,185; S.I,33=Kvu 345 (=pānīyadāna-sālā SA); S.I,100 (read papañ ca vivane); J.I,109; DhA.III,349=J.I,302 (=pānīya-cāṭī C.); Vv 52²² (+udapāna); Pv.II,7⁸ (n. pl. papāyo=pānīya-sālā PvA.102); II,9²⁵ (+udapāna). (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【阴】路旁供给旅行者的一个棚(a shed by the roadside to provide travellers with water)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Papāta: {'def': '[cp. Epic. Sk. prapāta, of pra+pat] 1. falling down, a fall Vin.II,284 (chinna-papātaṁ papatanti); S.V,47. ‹-› 2. a cliff, precipice, steep rock M.I,11; S.III,109 (sobbho p. kodh’upāyāsass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ; cp. papaṭā); A.III,389 (sobbho p.); J.III,5; 530; V,70; VI,306, 309; Vism.116; PvA.174; Sdhp.208, 282, 353. -- adj. falling off steeply, having an abrupt end Vin.II,237=A.IV,198, 200 (samuddo na āyatakena p.).

--taṭa a rocky or steep declivity DhA.I,73. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】悬崖，陡直的岩石。papātaṭa,【阳】陡峭的山坡。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Papātin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. papatati] falling or flying forward, flying up J.III,484 (uccā° flying away). (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Papīliṭa: {'def': '[pa+pīḷita] worn out, rubbed through (of the sole of sandals) J.II,223. (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Papīyana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pā, ger. pa-pīya] drinkable, to be drunk, drinking J.I,109 (udakaṁ papīyana-bhāvena papā ti). (Page 413)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Para: {'def': '(Ved. para, parā, paraṁ),【形】1.其他的，另外的，外国的，外侨的，局外人(beyond, on the further side of (with Abl. or Loc.), over, paro and parā & cp. cpds. like paraloka)。2.他，敌(na para, 无障难，无敌，无对手)。sg. Nom. paro, Acc. paraṁ, Gen. Dat. parassa, Instr. parena, Loc. paramhi, and pare; pl. Nom. pare, Acc. pare, Gen. Dat. paresaṁ, Instr. parehi。pāra,【中】。parakata【形】他人所做的。parakāra【阳】他人的行动。parajana【阳】陌生人，局外人。parattha【阳】他人的福利。paradattūpajīvī【形】依他人所施而活的。paraneyya【形】被他人引导的。parapaccaya﹐parapattiya【形】依靠他人的。parappavāda, 异道持他论者(指信仰佛教以外之言论者，一般称「外道」)。parapuṭṭha﹐【形】被他人教育的。parapessa﹐【形】服务他人的。parabhāga﹐【阳】后面的部分，外部的部份。paraloka【阳】彼世。paravambhana﹐【中】他人的轻视。paravāda﹐【阳】相反的见解。paravādī﹐【阳】论争的对手。paravisaya【阳】外国，另外的王国。parasenā﹐【阳】敌军。parahatthagata﹐【形】被敌人抓住的。parahita【阳】他人的福利。parahetu﹐【副】其他的原因。1.(adv.& prep.) beyond, on the further side of (with Abl.or Loc.), over(para Gangāya, v.l.°āyaŋ).-- 2.(adj.) para follows the pron.declension; cases：sg.Nom.paro, Acc.paraŋ, Gen.Dat.parassa, Instr.parena, Loc.paramhi Sn 634, and pare; pl.Nom.pare, Acc.pare, Gen.Dat.paresaṁ, Instr.parehi.-- Meanings：(a) beyond, i.e."higher" in space (like Ved.para as opp. to avara lower), as well as "further" in time (i.e.future, to come, or also remote, past：see Loc.pare under c.), freq.in phrase paro loko the world beyond, the world (i.e.life) to come, the beyond or future life (opp. ayaŋ loko) (asmā lokā paraŋ lokaŋ na socati), (asmiŋ loke paramhi ca); (paramhi loke); (id.=paraloke); but also in other combn, like santi-para (adj.) higher than calm.Cp.paraloka, paraŋ and paro.-- (b) another, other, adj.as well as n., pl.others(parassa dāraŋ nqtikkameyya), (paresaṁ, cp.Nd1 150); (ko paro who else), (pare others); (parassa dānaṁ); II.943 (pare, Loc.= paramhi parassa);(Gen.pl.); (paresaṁ Dat.) (parassa purisassa & paraŋ purisaŋ).Often contrasted with and opposed to attano (one’s own, oneself), (paraṁ vambheti attānaŋ ukkaŋseti);(attānaṁ samukkaṁse paraṁ avajānāti); (paresaṁ, opp. attanā); (att-attha opp. par-attha, see cpds.°ajjhāsaya & °attha).-- paro ...paro "the one ...the other" (kiŋ hi paro parassa karissati); paro paraŋ one another (paro paraŋ nikubbetha). In a special sense we find pare pl.in the meaning of "the others," i.e.outsiders, aliens (to the religion of the Buddha), enemies, opponents (like Vedic pare) (=paṭiviruddhā sattā).-- (c) some oblique cases in special meaning and used as adv.：paraṁ Acc.sg.m.see under cpds., like parantapa; as nt.adv.see sep.In phrase puna ca paraŋ would be better read puna c’aparaŋ (see apara).--parena (Instr.) later on, afterwards (=aparena samayena C.).--pare (Loc.); in the past, before, yet earlier (where it continues ajja and hiyyo, i.e.to-day and yesterday, and refers to the day before yesterday.Similarly at Vin IV.63 pare is contrasted with ajja & hiyyo and may mean "in future," or "the day before yesterday." It is of interest to notice the Ved.use of pare as "in the future" opp. to adya & wvas); (the day before yesterday).(sve vā pare vā) and in the sense of "on the day after tomorrow." --parā (only apparently Abl., in reality either para+a° which represents the vocalic beginning of the second part of the cpd., or para+ā which is the directional prefix ā, emphasizing para.The latter expln is more in the spirit of the Pali language)：see separately.--paro (old Abl.as adv.=Sk.paras) beyond further：see sep.--parato (Abl.) in a variety of expressions and shades of meaning, viz.(1) from another, as regards others(attano parato ca).-- (2) from the point of view of "otherness," i.e.as strange or something alien, as an enemy (in "anicca"--passage);Miln 418 and passim; in phrase parato disvā "seen as not myself"(saṅkhāre parato passa, dukkhato mā ca attato).(3) on the other side of, away from, beyond(kuḍḍānaŋ).-- (4) further, afterwards, later on.-- Note.The compounds with para° are combinations either with para 1 (adv.prep.), or para 2 (adj.n.).Those containing para in form parā and in meaning "further on to" see separately under parā°.See also pāra, pārima etc.%b\xa0\xa0--ajjhāsaya intent on others (opp. att°).--attha (parattha, to be distinguished from adv.parattha, q.v.sep.) the profit or welfare of another (opp. attattha).--qdhīna dependent on others(=paresu adhīno parass’eva ruciyā pavattati); (°vuttika); (°vutti, paresaṁ bhāraŋ vahanto).--ûpakkama aggression of an enemy, violence.--ûpaghāta injuring others, cruelty.--ûpaghātin killing others(=paraŋ upahananto).--ûpavāda reproaching others.--kata see paraṅkata.--kamma service of others, °kārin serving others.--kāra see below under paraṅkāra.--kula clan of another, strange or alien clan.--kkanta [para° or parā° *krānta?] walked (by another? or gone over?).--kkama (parā+kram) exertion, endeavour, effort, strife (daḷha°); (purisa°); (purisa°);; adj.(-°) sacca° one who strives after the truth.--kkamati [*parakramati] to advance, go forward, exert oneself, undertake, show courage(ger. parakkamma);(imper. parakkāma, v.l.parakkama)(=payogaŋ karoti).--kkaroti [either for parā+kr or more likely paras+kr, cp.paro] lit."to put on the opposite side," i.e.to remove, do away with(corresponding to apaneti, C.explns as "parato kāreti," taking parato in the sense of para 2 c 3), (mā parākari=mā pariccaji C.).--gatta alien body, trsl."limbs that are not thou".--gavacaṇḍa violent against the cows of another (opp. sakagavacaṇḍa, cp.PugA 226：yo attano gogaṇaŋ ghaṭṭeti, paragogaṇe pana so rato sukhasīlo hoti etc.).--(n)kata made by something or somebody else, extra-self, extraneous, alien(nayidaŋ attakataŋ bimbaŋ nayidaŋ parakataŋ aghaŋ); with ref.to loka & dukkha and opposed to sayaṅkata.--(n)kāra condition of otherness, other people, alienity(opp. ahaṅkara 自我selfhood).--citta the mind or heart of others.--jana a stranger, enemy, demon, fig.devil (cp.Sk.itarajana) --tthaddha [parā+tthaddha] propped against, founded on, relying on (with Loc.) (=upatthadda C.).--tthabbha is to be read for °tthambha at, in meaning=°tthaddha (kismiŋ).--dattûpajīvin living on what is given by others, dependent on another’s gift.--davutta see sep.under parada --dāra the wife of another, somebody else’s wife (°sevanā) (°upasevin, cp.DhA III.482); (°kamma).--dārika (better to be read as pāra°) an adulterer.--dhammika "of someone else’s norm," one who follows the teaching of another, i.e.of an heretic teacher (Nd1 485：p° ā vuccanti satta sahadhammika ṭhapetvā ye keci Buddhe appasannā, dhamme appannā, saṅghe appasannā).--niṭṭhita made ready by others S I.236.--nimmita "created by another," in °vasavattin having power under control of another, N.of a class of Devas (see deva).--neyya to be led by another, under another’s rule (=parapattiya parapaccaya).--(n)tapa worrying or molesting another person (opp. attantapa).--pāṇa other living beings.--puggala other people.--putta somebody else’s son.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.-adj.) [fr. Idg. *per, *peri (cp. pari); Ved. para, parā, paraṁ; Lat. per through, Gr. pέra & pέran beyond; see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under per & also pari, pubba, pura, purāṇa] 1. (adv. & prep.) beyond, on the further side of (with Abl. or Loc.), over PvA.168 (para Gaṅgāya, v. l. °āyaṁ). See in same meaning & application paraṁ, paro and parā & cp. cpds. like paraloka. -- 2. (adj.) para follows the pron. declension; cases: sg. Nom. paro Sn.879, Acc. paraṁ Sn.132, 185, Gen. Dat. parassa Sn.634; Pv.II,9¹⁹, Instr. parena PvA.116, Loc. paramhi Sn.634, and pare Pv.II,9⁴³; pl. Nom. pare Dh.6, Acc. pare Dh.257; PvA.15, Gen. Dat. paresaṁ D.I,3; Th.1, 743; J.I,256; Sn.818, Instr. parehi Sn.240, 255; PvA.17. -- Meanings: (a) beyond, i. e. “higher” in space (like Ved. para as opp. to avara lower), as well as “further” in time (i. e. future, to come, or also remote, past: see Loc. pare under c.), freq. in phrase paro loko the world beyond, the world (i. e. life) to come, the beyond or future life (opp. ayaṁ loko) Sn.185 (asmā lokā paraṁ lokaṁ na socati), 634 (asmiṁ loke paramhi ca); Dh.168 (paramhi loke); Pv.II,8³ (id.=paraloke PvA.107); but also in other combⁿ, like santi-para (adj.) higher than calm Dh.202. Cp. paraloka, paraṁ and paro. -- (b) another, other, adj. as well as n., pl. others Sn.396 (parassa dāraṁ nâtikkameyya), 818 (paresaṁ, cp. Nd¹ 150); Dh.160 (ko paro who else), 257 (pare others); Pv.II,9¹⁹ (parassa dānaṁ); II,9⁴³ (pare, Loc.= paramhi parassa PvA.130); DhA.IV,182 (Gen. pl.); PvA.15, 60 (paresaṁ Dat.), 103, 116, 253 (parassa purisassa & paraṁ purisaṁ). Often contrasted with and opposed to attano (one’s own, oneself), e. g. at M.I,200 (paraṁ vambheti attānaṁ ukkaṁseti); Sn.132 (attānaṁ samukkaṁse paraṁ avajānāti); J.I,256 (paresaṁ, opp. attanā); Nd² 26 (att-attha opp. par-attha, see cpds. °ajjhāsaya & °attha). -- paro . . . paro “the one . . . the other” D.I,224 (kiṁ hi paro parassa karissati); paro paraṁ one another Sn.148 (paro paraṁ nikubbetha). ‹-› In a special sense we find pare pl. in the meaning of “the others,” i. e. outsiders, aliens (to the religion of the Buddha), enemies, opponents (like Vedic pare) D.I,2 (=paṭiviruddhā sattā DA.I,51); Vin.I,349; Dh.6. -- (c) some oblique cases in special meaning and used as adv.: paraṁ Acc. sg. m. see under cpds., like parantapa; as nt. adv. see sep. In phrase puna ca paraṁ would be better read puna c’aparaṁ (see apara). --parena (Instr.) later on, afterwards J.III,395 (=aparena samayena C.). --pare (Loc.); cp. Gr. parai/ at; Lat. prae before; Goth. faúra=E, for, old Dat. of *per) in the past, before, yet earlier J.II,279 (where it continues ajja and hiyyo, i. e. to-day and yesterday, and refers to the day before yesterday. Similarly at Vin.IV,63 pare is contrasted with ajja & hiyyo and may mean “in future,” or “the day before yesterday.” It is of interest to notice the Ved. use of pare as “in the future” opp. to adya & śvas); J.III,423 (the day before yesterday). At DhA.I,253 (sve vā pare vā) and IV.170 in the sense of “on the day after tomorrow.” --parā (only apparently Abl., in reality either para+a° which represents the vocalic beginning of the second part of the cpd., or para+ā which is the directional prefix ā, emphasizing para. The latter explⁿ is more in the spirit of the Pali language): see separately. --paro (old Abl. as adv.=Sk. paras) beyond further: see sep. --parato (Abl.) in a variety of expressions and shades of meaning, viz. (1) from another, as regards others A.III,337 (attano parato ca); Nett 8 (ghosa), 50 (id.). -- (2) from the point of view of “otherness,” i. e. as strange or something alien, as an enemy M.I,435 (in “anicca”--passage); A.IV,423; Nd² 214^II; Ps.II,238; Kvu 400; Miln.418 and passim; in phrase parato disvā “seen as not myself” Th.1, 1160; 2, 101; S.I,188 (saṅkhāre parato passa, dukkhato mā ca attato). ‹-› (3) on the other side of, away from, beyond J.II,128; PvA.24 (kuḍḍānaṁ). -- (4) further, afterwards, later on S.I,34; J.I,255; IV,139; SnA 119, 482. -- Note. The compounds with para° are combinations either with para 1 (adv. prep.), or para 2 (adj. n.). Those containing para in form parā and in meaning “further on to” see separately under parā°. See also pāra, pārima etc.

--ajjhāsaya intent on others (opp. att°) SnA 46. --attha (parattha, to be distinguished from adv. parattha, q. v. sep.) the profit or welfare of another (opp. attattha) S.II,29; A.III,63; Dh.166; Nd² 26. --âdhīna dependent on others D.I,72 (=paresu adhīno parass’eva ruciyā pavattati DA.I,212); J.VI,99; ThA.15 (°vuttika); VvA.23 (°vutti, paresaṁ bhāraṁ vahanto). --ûpakkama aggression of an enemy, violence Vin.II,194. --ûpaghāta injuring others, cruelty Vv 84⁴⁰. --ûpaghātin killing others Dh.184 (=paraṁ upahananto p. DhA.III,237). --ûpavāda reproaching others Sn.389. --kata see paraṅkata. --kamma service of others, °kārin serving others Vv 33²². --kāra see below under paraṅkāra. --kula clan of another, strange or alien clan Sn.128; Dh.73. --kkanta [para° or parā° *krānta?] walked (by another? or gone over?) J.VI,559 (better to be read with v. l. on p. 560 as pada° i. e. walked by feet, footprint). --kkama (parā+kram] exertion, endeavour, effort, strife D.I,53; III,113; S.I,166 (daḷha°); II,28 (purisa°); V,66, 104 sq.; A.I,4, 50 (purisa°); IV,190; Sn.293; Dh.313; Nd¹ 487; J.I,256; II,153; Dhs.13, 12, 289, 571; Miln.244; DhA.IV,139; Sdhp.253; adj. (-°) sacca° one who strives after the truth J.IV,383. --kkamati [*parakramati] to advance, go forward, exert oneself, undertake, show courage Sn.966 (ger. parakkamma); Dh.383 (id.); Pv III,2¹³ (imper. parakkāma, v. l. parakkama); Pug.19, 23; PvA.184 (=payogaṁ karoti); Sdhp.439. --kkaroti [either for parā+kṛ or more likely paras+kṛ, cp. paro] lit. “to put on the opposite side,” i. e. to remove, do away with J.IV,26 (corresponding to apaneti, C. expl^ns as “parato kāreti,” taking parato in the sense of para 2 c 3), 404 (mā parākari=mā pariccaji C.). --gatta alien body, trsl. “limbs that are not thou” Th.1, 1150. --gavacaṇḍa violent against the cows of another A.II,109=Pug.47 (opp. sakagavacaṇḍa, cp. PugA 226: yo attano gogaṇaṁ ghaṭṭeti, paragogaṇe pana so rato sukhasīlo hoti etc.). --(n)kata made by something or somebody else, extra-self, extraneous, alien S.I,134 (nayidaṁ attakataṁ bimbaṁ nayidaṁ parakataṁ aghaṁ); with ref. to loka & dukkha and opposed to sayaṅkata D.III,137 sq.; S.II,19 sq., 33 sq., 38 sq.; Ud.69 sq. --(n)kāra condition of otherness, other people, alienity Ud.70 (opp. ahaṅkara selfhood). --citta the mind or heart of others A.V,160. --jana a stranger, enemy, demon, fig. devil (cp. Sk. itarajana) M.I,153, 210. --tthaddha [parā+tthaddha] propped against, founded on, relying on (with Loc.) J.VI,181 (=upatthadda C.). --tthabbha is to be read for °tthambha at J.IV,313, in meaning=°tthaddha (kismiṁ). --dattûpajīvin living on what is given by others, dependent on another’s gift Sn.217; Miln.294. --davutta see sep. under parada --dāra the wife of another, somebody else’s wife M.I,87; A.II,71, 191; Sn.108, 242 (°sevanā); Dh.246, 309 (°upasevin, cp. DhA.III,482); J.VI,240; DhA.III,481 (°kamma). --dārika (better to be read as pāra°) an adulterer S.II,188, 259; J.III,43. --dhammika “of someone else’s norm,” one who follows the teaching of another, i. e. of an heretic teacher Sn.96Q (Nd¹ 485: p° ā vuccanti satta sahadhammika ṭhapetvā ye keci Buddhe appasannā, dhamme appa nnā, Saṅghe appasannā). --niṭṭhita made ready by others S.I,236. --nimmita “created by another,” in °vasavattin having power under control of another, N. of a class of Devas (see deva) D.I,216 sq.; A.I,210; It.94; Pug.51; DA.I,114, 121; KhA 128; VvA.79. --neyya to be led by another, under another’s rule Sn.907 Nd¹ 321 (=parapattiya parapaccaya). --(n)tapa worrying or molesting another person (opp. attantapa) D.III,232; M.I,341, 411; II,159; Pug.56. --paccaya resting, relying, or dependent on someone else Nd¹ 321; usually neg. a° independent of another Vin.I,12, 181 and passim. --pattiya=prec. Nd¹ 321. --pāṇa other living beings Sn.220. --puggala other people D.III,108. --putta somebody else’s son A.IV,169; Sn.43. --pessa serving others, being a servant Sn.615 (=paresaṁ veyyāvacca SnA 466). --pessiyā a female servant or messenger, lit. to be sent by others J.III,413 (=parehi pesitabbā pesanakārikā C.). --ppavāda [cp. BSk. parapravādin “false teacher” Divy 202] disputation with another, challenge, opposition in teaching (appl^d to Non-Buddhistic systems) S.V,261; A.II,238; Miln.170, 175. --bhāga outer part, precinct part beyond PvA.24. --bhuta [Sk. parabhṛta] the Indian cuckoo (lit. brought up by another) J.V,416 (so read for parābhūta). --bhojana food given by others Sn.366 (=parehi dinnaṁ saddhādeyyaṁ SnA 364). --loka [cpd. either with para 1. or para 2. It is hardly justified to assume a metaphysical sense, or to take para as temporal in the sense of paraṁ (cp. paraṁmaraṇā after death), i. e. the future world or the world to come] the other world, the world beyond (opp. ayaṁ loko this world or idhaloka the world here, see on term Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 29 sq.) D.I,27, 58, 187; II,319; S.I,72, 138; Sn.579, 666, 1117; Nd¹ 60; Nd² 214 (v. l. for paloka in anicca-passage) 410 (=manussalokaṁ ṭhapetvā sabbo paraloko); Ps.I,121; Vv 84⁵ (=narakaṁ hi sattānaṁ ekantânatthatāya parabhūto paṭisattubhūto loko ti visesato paraloko ti VvA.335); PvA.5, 60 (=pettivisaya parattha), 64Q, 107, 253 (idhalokato p. natthi); SnA 478 (=parattha); Sdhp.316, 326, 327. --vambhitā contempt of others M.I,19 (a°). --vambhin contempting others M.I,19, 527. --vasatta power (over others) Dāvs.IV,19. --vāda (1) talk of others, public rumour S.I,4; Sn.819 (cp. Nd¹ 151); SnA 475. (2) opposition Miln.94 sq. --vādin opponent Miln.348. visaya the other world, realm of the Dead, Hades Pv IV.8⁷ (=pettivisaya PvA.268). --vediya to be known by others, i. e. heterodox D.II,241; Sn.474 (=parehi ñāpetabba SnA 410). --sattā (pl.) other beings A.I,255=III,17 (+parapuggalā). --suve on the day after tomorrow DhA.IV,170 (v. l. SS for pare, see para 2 c.). --sena a hostile army D.I,89=II.16= III,59=Sn.p. 106 ≈ (cp. DA.I,250=SnA 450). --hattha the hand of the enemy J.I,179. --hiṁsā hurting others Pv III,7³. --hita the good or welfare of others (opp. attahita) D.III,233; PvA.16, 163. --hetu on account of others, through others Sn.122 (attahetu+); Pug.54. (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Para-: {'def': '﹐【字首】他，彼，相反的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parada: {'def': '(adj.) [for uparada (?)=uparata, pp. of upa+ ram] finding pleasure in, fond of, only in two (doubtful) cpds. viz. °vutta [unexpl^d, perhaps v for y, as daya› dava through influence of d in parada°; thus=parata+ yutta?] “fond of being prepared,” adapted, apt, active, alert; only in one stock phrase (which points to this form as being archaic and probably popular etymology, thus distorting its real derivation), viz. appossukka pannaloma +Vin.II,184 (Vin. Texts III,232 trsl. “secure,” cp. Vin.II,363); M.I,450; II,121 (v. l. BB paradatta°), -- and °samācāra living a good (active) life M.I,469. (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paradāra: {'def': '【阳】别人的妻子(somebody else’s wife)。paradārakamma,【中】通奸。paradāragamana(=paradāraṁ gacchato),【形】去(淫)他人的妻子，通奸的。paradārika, pāradārika,【阳】强暴他妻，通奸者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parajjhati: {'def': 'see parājeti. (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parakkama: {'def': '【阳】parakkamana,【中】努力(exertion; endeavour; effort)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parakkamati: {'def': '(parā+kamm +a),发挥(exerts)，勇气(shows courage)。【过】parakkami。【过分】parakkanta。【现分】parakkamanta。【独】parakkamitvā, parakkamma。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parama: {'def': '【形】较高的(superior)，最好的(best)，卓越的(excellent)。paramatā,【阴】(在【合】中)最高的数量，最多。nāḷikodanaparamatāya = 最多1 nāḷi的饭量。paramattha,【阳】最高的理想，最终意义的事实。paramāyu ,【中】年限。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic parama; superl. formation of para, lit. “farthest,” cp. similarly, although fr. diff. base, Lat. prīmus] highest, most excellent, superior, best; paraphrased by agga seṭṭha visiṭṭha at Nd² 502 A= Nd¹ 84, 102 (the latter reading viseṭṭha for visiṭṭha); by uttama at DhA.III,237; VvA.78. -- D.I,124 (ettaka°); M.II,120 (°nipacca); S.I,166; II,277; V,230; A.V,64 (°diṭṭha-dhamma-nibbāna); Sn.138 (yasaṁ paramaṁ patto), 296 (°ā mittā), 788 (suddhaṁ °ṁ arogaṁ), 1071 (saññāvimokhe °e vimutto); Dh.184 (nibbānaṁ °ṁ vadanti Buddhā). 203, 243; Vv 16¹ (°alaṅkata= paramaṁ ativiya visesato VvA.78) Pv.II,9¹⁰ (°iddhi); Pug.15, 16, 66; SnA 453 (°issara); PvA.12 (°nipacca). 15 (°duggandha), 46. -- At the end of a cpd. (-°) “at the outmost, at the highest, at most; as a minimum, at least” Vin.IV,263 (dvaṅgula-pabba°); esp. freq. in phrase sattakkhattu° one who will be reborn seven times at the outmost, i. e. at the end of the 7 rebirthinterval S.II,185 (sa°); V,205; A.I,233; IV,381; V,120; It.18; Kvu 469. See pāramī & pāramitā.

--attha [cp. class. Sk. paramārtha] the highest good, ideal; truth in the ultimate sense, philosophical truth (cp. Kvu trsl. 180; J.P.T.S. 1914, 129 sq.; Cpd. 6, 81); Arahantship Sn.68 (=vuccati Amataṁ Nibbānaṁ etc. Nd² 409), 219 (°dassin); Nd² 26; Miln.19, 31; °dīpanī Exposition of the Highest Truth, N. of the Commentary on Th, Vv and Pv; mentioned e. g. at PvA.71; °jotikā id., N. of the C. on Kh and Sn, mentioned e. g. at KhA 11. -- As °-, in Instr. and Abl. used adverbially in meaning of “in the highest sense, absolutely, kat) e)coxήn, primarily, ideally, in an absolute sense,” like °pāramī Bu I.77 °visuddhi A.V,64; °saññita Th.2, 210; °suñña Ps.II,184; °suddhi SnA 528; Abl. paramatthato Miln.28; VvA.24 (manusso), 30 (bhikkhu), 72 (jīvitindriyaṁ); PvA.146 (pabbajito, corresponding to anavasesato), 253 (na koci kiñci hanati=not at all); Instr. paramatthena Miln.71 (vedagū), 268 (sattûpaladdhi). --gati the highest or best course of life or future exsitence Vv 35¹² (=anupādisesa-nibbāna VvA.164). (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paramattha: {'def': '「究竟法」，也就是不用概念思惟想像，而直接被觉知的真实事物。依据阿毘达磨，有四种究竟法：「心」、「心所」(名法的一种，和「心」共生、共灭)、「色」和「涅盘」。也可参考注*26。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Paramattha-dīpanī: {'def': 'f. 自説経, 如是語経, 天宮事, 餓鬼事, 長老偈, 長老尼偈, 所行蔵の註釈. UdA., ItA., VvA., PvA., ThagA., ThīgA., CpA.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. 自說經, 如是語經, 天宮事, 餓鬼事, 長老偈, 長老尼偈, 所行藏的註釋. UdA., ItA., VvA., PvA., ThagA., ThīgA., CpA.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Paramattha-jotikā: {'def': 'f. 小誦経および経集の註釈. KhpA., SnA.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. 小誦經及經集的註釋. KhpA., SnA.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Paramattha-mañjūsā: {'def': 'f. 清浄道論の註. VMṬ.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. 清淨道論的註. VMṬ.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Paramatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. parama, Vedic paramatā highest position] the highest quantity, measure on the outside, minimum or maximum D.I,60 (ghāsa-cchādana-paramatāya santuṭṭho contented with a minimum of food & clothing; DA.I,169 expl^s by uttamatāya); M.I,10 (abyābajjha°); S.I,82 (nāḷik’odana-paramatāya on a nāḷi of boiled rice at the most); freq. in phrase sattakkhattuṁ p. interval of seven rebirths at the outside (cp. parama), being reborn seven times at the most S.II,134 sq.; V,458; Kvu 469 (cp. Kvu trsl. 268³). (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parammukha: {'def': '【形】不在场的，脸转开的。paramukhā,【副】不在场，在缺席中(in one’s absence)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paramparā: {'def': '【阴】血统(lineage)，世系(succession)，系列(series)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paramāṇu: {'def': '【阳】极微(aṇu的第36个部份)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paranimmita-vasavatti-deva: {'def': "'heavenly beings with power over the productions of others', constitute a class of heavenly beings in the sensuous sphere (kāma-loka). Māra (q.v.) is said to be their ruler. Cf. loka, deva I.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Paranimmitavasavatti: {'def': '他化自在天。魔天即属于此天。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Paranimmitavasavattin: {'def': 'm. [Para-nimmita-vasa-vattin] 他化自在 [天].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. [Para-nimmita-vasa-vattin] 他化自在 [天].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Parasu: {'def': '【阳】手斧(hatchet)，斧(axe)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parasupahāra: {'def': 'at S.V,441 is to be corrected to pharasu°. (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parasuve: {'def': '﹐【副】后天(day after tomorrow)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parattha: {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic parastāt beyond] elsewhere, hereafter, in the Beyond, in the other world S.I,20; Sn.661=It.42=Dh.306; Dh.177; J.II,417; Pv.I,11¹⁰ (=paraloke PvA.60); III,1²⁰ (=samparāye PvA.177); SnA 478 (=paraloke). (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】【阳】在另外的一个地方中，将来(hereafter)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paraṁ: {'def': '(param°) (adv.) [orig. nt. of para] further, away (from); as prep. (w. Abl.) after, beyond; absolute only in phrase ito paraṁ from here, after this, further, e. g. KhA 131; SnA 160, 178, 412, 512, 549; PvA.83, 90; also in tato paraṁ J.III,281.

--parā (f.) [adv. converted into a noun paraṁ+Abl. of para] lit. “after the other,” i. e. succession, series Vin.II,110; IV,77, 78 (parampara-bhojana “taking food in succession,” successive feeding, see under bhojana, and cp. C. at Vin.IV,77, 78 and Vin Texts I.38); D.I,239; M.I,520; A.II,191 (paramparāya in phrase anussavena p. itikirāya, as at Nd² 151); Bu I.79; J.I,194; IV,35 (expl^d by C. as purisa°, viz. a series of husbands, but probably misunderstood, Kern, Toev. s. v. interperts as “defamation, ravishing”); Nett 79 (°parahetu); Miln.191, 276; DhsA.314; SnA 352; DhA.I,49 (sīsa°). --maraṇā (adv.) after death; usually in combⁿ with kāyassa bhedā p. after the dissolution of the body, i. e. after death S.I,231; D.I,245; PvA.27, 133; absolutely only in phrase hoti Tathāgato p. D.I,188, 192; A.V,193. --mukhā (adv.) in one’s absence, lit. with face turned away (opp. sammukhā in presence, thus at J.III,263 where parammukhā corresponds to raho and sam° to āvi; PvA.13) D.I,230 (parammukhin?); DhA.II,109. (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐(adv.) after; beyond; further; on the other side of.|| pāraṁ (adv.) beyond; across; over.Paraŋ (param°) (adv.) [orig.nt.of para] further, away (from); as prep.(w.Abl.) after, beyond; absolute only in phrase ito paraṁ from here, after this, further; also in tato paraṁ(从此之后).%b\xa0\xa0--parā (f.) [adv.converted into a noun paraŋ+Abl.of para] lit."after the other," i.e.succession, series Vin II.110; IV.77, 78 (parampara-bhojana "taking food in succession," successive feeding, see under bhojana, and cp.C.at Vin IV.77, 78 and Vin Texts I.38); (paramparāya in phrase anussavena p.itikirāya, as at Nd2 151); Bu I.79; J I.194; IV.35 (expld by C.as purisa°, viz.a series of husbands, but probably misunderstood, Kern, Toev.s.v.interperts as "defamation, ravishing"); Nett 79 (°parahetu); (sīsa°).--maraṇā (adv.) after death; usually in combn with kāyassa bhedā p.after the dissolution of the body, i.e.after death; absolutely only in phrase hoti Tathāgato p.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pare: {'def': '(adv.) see para 2 c. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pareta: {'def': '【形】折磨的，被征服的，继续的。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of pareti, more likely para+i than pari+i, although BSk. correspondent is parīta, e. g. śokaparīta Jtm 31⁹⁴] gone on to, affected with, overcome by (-°), syn. with abhibhūta (e. g. PvA.41, 80). Very frequent in combⁿ with terms of suffering, misadventure and passion, e. g. khudā°, ghamma°, jighacchā°, dukkha°, dosa°, rāga°, soka°, sneha°, Vin.I,5; D.II,36; M.I,13, 114, 364, 460; III,14, 92; S.II,110; III,93; IV,28; A.I,147=It.89; A.III,25, 96; Sn.449, 736, 818 (=samohita samannāgata pihita Nd¹ 149) 1092, 1123; J.III,157; Pv.I,8⁶; II,2⁴; Miln.248; PvA.61, 93. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】折磨的，被征服的，继续的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pareti: {'def': '[in form=parā+i but more likely pari+i, thus= pariyeti] to set out for, go on to, come to (Acc.) S.II,20; A.V,2, 139 sq., 312; J.V,401 (=pakkhandati C.). pp. pareta (q. v.). (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pari-: {'def': '【字首】圆满(all round)，全部(altogether)，完全地(completely)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paribandha: {'def': 'at ThA.242 is C. reading for paripantha at Th.2, 352; also at Vism.147, 152. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribbajati: {'def': '(pari+vaj+a) ,到处游荡(wonders about)。【过】paribbaji。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+vraj] to wander about (as a religious mendicant) Sn.74, 639; It.109; Dh.346, 415; J.IV,452. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribbasāna: {'def': '(adj.) [ppr. med. of pari+vas] abiding, staying by Sn.796 (=vasamāna SnA 529; sakāya diṭṭhiyā vasanti Nd¹ 102), 878, 880, 895. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribbaya: {'def': '【阳】费用，花费，薪水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+vaya, i. e. *vyaya] 1. earned money, earnings, wages J.I,156 (°ṁ datvā), 296 (id.), 433; IV,170; DhA.IV,196. -- 2, expense, expenditure J.II,213, (nivāsa° expense for a lodging), 249, 368; III,287 (°ṁ karoti to invest); VI,383; VvA.75; PvA.3 (sahassaṁ sahassaṁ °ṁ karoti), 97 (nicca°); Dāvs.V,66. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribbhamana: {'def': '【中】到处漫游，四周旋转。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paribbhamati: {'def': '[pari+bhamati] 1. to walk or roam about PvA.6, 47 (ito c’ito), 63 (saṁsāre), 100, 166 (saṁsare). ‹-› 2. to reel about J.III,288; IV,407. -- Caus. °bbhameti to make reel round J.VI,155. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+bham+a) 到处走走，到处漫游。【过】paribbhami。【过分】paribbhanta。【现分】paribbhamanta。【独】paribbhamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paribbhameti: {'def': '(paribbhamati 的【使】) 使旋转。【过】paribbhamesi。【过分】paribbhamita。【独】paribbhametvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paribbāja: {'def': '=paribbājaka S.I,49; Sn.134; Dh.313; DhA.III,485. °vata the vow of a p. ThA.73. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribbājaka: {'def': '[fr. pari+vraj] a wandering man, a Wanderer, wandering religious mendicant, not necessarily Buddhist (cp. Muir, J.R.A.S. 1866, 321; Lassen, Ind. Alt II.114, 277, 468; Vin. Texts I.41) Vin.I,342; IV,285 (bhikkhuñ ca sāmaṇerañ ca ṭhapetvā yo koci paribbājaka-samāpanno); D.I,157; III,1 sq., 35 sq., 53 sq., 130 sq.; M.I,64, 84; S.I,78; II,22, 119, 139; III,257 sq.; IV,230, 251, 391 sq.; A.I,115, 157, 185, 215; II,29 sq., 176; IV,35 sq., 338, 378; V,48 sq.; Sn.537, 553; J.I,85; Ud.14, 65; DA.I,35; PvA.31. -- f. paribbājikā Vin.IV,285; M.I,305; S.III,238 sq.; Ud.13, 43 sq. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】遍行者，云游僧。游行僧(a wandering religious mendicant)。另有游行僧āgantuka﹐【梵】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paribbājana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paribbajati] wandering about or practising the customs of a mendicant SnA 434. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribbājayitar: {'def': '[n. ag. of paribbajati] one who indulges in the practice of a Wanderer, fig. one who leads a virtuous ascetic life Sn.537 (T. °vajjayitā). Perhaps we should read °bājayitvā for °bājayitā, cp. SnA 434 nikkhamet[v]ā niddhamet[v]ā. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribbājika: {'def': '【阴】云游尼。游行尼(a wandering nun)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paribbūlha: {'def': '(paribrūhati的【过分】) 包含，包围。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paribbūḷha: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of paribrūhati] encompassed, provided with, surrounded A.III,34; Sn.301 (=parikiṇṇa SnA 320); J.IV,120; V,68, 322, 417; VI,452. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhata: {'def': '[pp. of pari+bhṛ] nurtured, nourished M.II,56 (sukha°). Also in explⁿ of pāribhaṭyatā (q. v.). (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhava: {'def': '【阳】paribhavana,【中】轻视，滥用。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+bhū] contempt, disrespect Vin.IV,241; A.III,191; J.V,436; VI,164; Vbh.353 sq.; PvA.257. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhavana: {'def': '(nt.)=paribhava DA.I,255. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhavati: {'def': '[pari+bhū], also paribhoti to treat with contempt, to neglect, despise S.I,69; A.III,174 sq. (°bhoti); J.III,16; V,442; Miln.23, 259; PvA.266. ‹-› grd. paribhotabba S.I,69; Sn.p. 93. (=paribhavitabba SnA 424). -- Caus. paribhāveti; pp. paribhūta (q. v.). (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+bhū+a) 不尊敬，轻视(also paribhoti, to treat with contempt, to neglect, despise)。【过】paribhavi。【过分】paribhabhūta。【现分】paribhavanta, paribhavamāna。【独】paribhavitvā。【义】paribhotabba。【使】paribhāveti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paribhaṇḍa: {'def': '[for paribandha, dialectical, see Kern, Toev. I.36, who compares Tamil panda “a surrounding wall” =P. bandha. The meaning is rather uncertain, cp. notes in Vin. Texts II.154; III,85, 213] 1. a binding along the back Vin.I,254, 297; II,116; J.V,254 (v. l. °daṇḍa). -- 2. a girdle, belt J.VI,125; DhA.II,174. ‹-› 3. a plastered flooring Vin.II,113, 172, 220; J.III,384; IV,92; V,437, 440. -- 4. slough of a serpent (?) J.VI,339. -- 5. (°-) adj. encircling, comprehensive, in °ñāṇa Vism.429. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】在地面上抺灰泥，环绕。paribhandakata,【形】抺过泥灰的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paribhaṭṭha: {'def': '(paribhassati的【过分】) 己跌落，已下降。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [pp. of paribhāsati] abused, censured, scolded J.VI,187. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of paribhassati of bhraś] fallen, dropped J.I,482; Th.1, p. 12ⁿ. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribheda: {'def': '[fr. pari+bhid, see paribhindati] 1. breaking, breaking up, falling to pieces Dhs.738, 874. -- 2. bursting, breaking open PvA.55. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhedaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paribheda in sense of paribhindati] breaking; a disturber of peace, breedbate J.II,173; III,168; V,245; VI,437. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhindati: {'def': '[pari+bhid] 1. to break up, split, create dissension, to set at variance J.I,439; IV,196; V,229; VI,368; PvA.13. -- 2. to break (see °bhinna). -- pp. paribhinna. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhinna: {'def': '(paribhindati的【过分】),已打破，已劈开，已使分歧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paribhindati] 1. broken, broken up M.I,190 (a°); VvA.184 (°vaṇṇa of broken up appearance, i. e. crumbly.). -- 2. set at variance, disconcerted, split Vin.III,161; J.II,193; DhsA.308; PvA.13. -- Cp. vi° (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhoga: {'def': '[fr. pari+bhuj] 1. material for enjoyment, food, feeding J.I,243; II,432; Miln.156, 403; DhA.II,66; SnA 342. -- 2. enjoyment, use Vin.IV,267; S.I,90; Nd¹ 262; Vism.33 (with pariyesana & paṭiggahana); DhA.I,60; PvA.25, 26, 220. -- Four paribhogas are distinguished at J.V,253 and at Vism.43, viz. theyya°, iṇa,° dāyajja°, sāmi°. Paribhoga discussed in relation to paṭilābha at Vism.43.

--cetiya a tree, shrine etc., used by the Buddha, & consequently sacred KhA 222. --dhātu a relic consisting of something used by the dead Saint (opp. sarīradhātu, remains of the body) Mhvs 15, 163. (cp. pāribhogika-dhātu); SnA 579. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】使用，享乐，饲养，享受的物质。paribhogacetiya,【中】圣地(佛陀用过的东西进而演变成圣物)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paribhojaniya: {'def': '【形】适合被用的。paribhojaniyudaka,【中】洗用水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(or °īya) (nt.) [orig. grd. of paribhunjati 2] that which is used for cleaning, water for washing Vin.II,76, 208, 216 (°ghaṭa), 226 (cp. Vin. Texts III,8); III,119 (pāniyaṁ); J.I,416; VI,75; DhA.I,58. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhutta: {'def': '(paribhuñjati的【过分】) 已吃，已使用，已享受。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paribhuñjati, cp. BSk. paribhukta Divy 277] used, employed, made use of Vin.II,109 (su°); J.III,257 (a°); DA.I,261 (sayaṁ °bhesajja); SnA 19. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhuñjana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paribhuñjati] eating PvA.35. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhuñjati: {'def': '[pari+bhuj] 1. to enjoy, to use, to enjoy the use of Vin.II,109; M.I,153 (nivāpaṁ p.), 207, S.II,29; Sn.240, 241, 423; Pv.I,1²; I,9⁴; IV,5² (=khādituṁ PvA.259); Nd² 427 (pariyesati paṭilabhati paribhuñjati); Miln.366, 395 (ālopaṁ °bhuñjisaṁ); Pv 3, 5 (modake eat up), 8, 13, 23, 47; Sdhp.394. -- grd. °bhuñjiya J.I,243 (dup°); & °bhuñjitabba PvA.71 (with nt. abstr. °tabbatta). -- Pass. °bhuñjiyati, ppr. °iyamāna S.I,90. -- 2. [see bhuñjatī²] to purify, clean, cleanse M.I,25; J.VI,75. -- pp. paribhutta (q. v.). (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+bhuj吃+ṁ-a) 吃，使用，享受。【过】paribhuñji。【过分】paribhutta。【现分】paribhubjanta, paribhubjamāna, 【独】paribhubjitvā, paribhutvā, paribhuñjiya。【潜】paribhubjitabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paribhāsa: {'def': '【阳】paribhāsana,【中】辱骂，过失，责难。paribhasaka,【形】虐待者，辱骂者，辱骂的，责备者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pari+bhāṣ] censure, abuse, blame J.V,373; PvA.175. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhāsaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paribhāsa, cp. BSk. paribhāṣaka Divy 38] reviling, abusing, abusive S.I,34; A.IV,79; Pv.I,11⁶ (=akkosaka PvA.58); IV,8⁴; VvA.69. See also akkosaka. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhāsati: {'def': '(pari+bhas+a) 辱骂，责骂，诽谤。【过】paribhāsi 。【过分】paribhasita。【现分】paribhāsamāna 。【独】paribhasitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+bhāṣ, cp. BSk. paribhāṣate Divy 38] to abuse, scold, revile, censure, deiame S.I,221; IV,61; Vin.IV,265; Sn.134, 663; J.I,112, 384 (for °hāsiṁsu) 469; III,421; IV,285 (read paribhāsentī for aribhāsentī); V,294; VI,523; Pv.II,10⁸; Pug.37; Miln.186; PvA.43. -- aor. °bhāsissaṁ Pv IV.8⁵, pl. °bhāsimhase Pv III,1¹¹. grd. °bhāsaniya Miln.186. -- Very frequently comb^d with akkosati (+p.), e. g. at Vin.II,14, 296; Ud.44; Pv.I,9³; PvA.10. -- pp. paribhaṭṭha² (q. v.). -- Caus. II. °bhāsāpeti id. Pv.I,6⁷. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhāvanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paribhāveti] permeation, penetration DhsA.163 (=vāsanā). (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhāveti: {'def': '[Caus. of paribhavati] to cause to be pervaded or penetrated, to treat, supply Vin.I,279 (uppalahatthāni bhesajjehi p.); J.IV,407. -- pp. paribhāvita (q. v.). (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhāvita: {'def': '(paribhāveti的【过分】) ,已训练，已穿透，已熟练，已混合，已装满，已养育。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paribhāveti] 1. penetrated, supplied, filled with, trained, set D.II,81 (saddhā-p. cittaṁ, sīla° etc.; trsl. “set round with,” cp. Dial. II.86), cp. S.V,369; Sn.23 (cittaṁ p.; SnA 37 saṁvāsiya); Miln.361; PvA.139 (°aya bhāvanāya codito). -- 2. compounded of, mixed with J.I,380, cp. IV.407; PvA.191. -- 3. fostered, treated, practised Miln.394 (bhesajjena kāyaṁ); PvA.257. -- 4. sat on (said of eggs), being hatched M.I,104; S.III,153; A.IV,125 sq., 176. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribhūta: {'def': '[pp. of paribhavati] treated with contempt, disregarded, despised Vin.IV,6; S.II,279; Miln.229, 288. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paribhavati的【过分】)已不尊敬，已轻视，已滥用，已辱骂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paribrahaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [to bṛh, see paribrūhati & cp. late Sk. paribarhaṇā] growth, increase, promotion Th.1, p. 2ⁿ. Cp. paribrūhana. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribrūhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paribrūhati, cp. upabrūhana] augmentation, increase Nett 79. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribrūhati: {'def': '[pari+brūhati of bṛh²] to augment, increase, do with zest VvA.115. -- Caus. °brūheti [cp. Sk. paribṛnhayati] to make strong, increase J.V,361 (aparibrūhayi aor. med. with a° neg., i. e. was weakened, lost his strength; but expl^d by C. as “atibrūhesi mahāsaddaṁ nicchāresi,” thus taking it to brū to speak, which is evidently a confusion). -- pp. paribbūḷha & paribrūhita (q. v.). (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribrūhita: {'def': '[pp. of paribrūheti] increased, furthered, strengthened ThA.245. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribyattatā: {'def': '(f.) [pari+vyatta+tā] great distinction, clearness; wide experience, learnedness Miln.349. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribādheti: {'def': '[pari+bādh] to oppress, attack PvA.193 (=hiṁsati). (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribāhati: {'def': '[pari+bāhati or preferably bāheti: see bahati³] to keep out, keep away from, hinder J.I,204 (ger. °bāhiya); PvA.214 (°bāhire). (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paribāhira: {'def': '【形】外部的，外国的，局外人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pari+bāhira] external, alien to; an outsider Vin.II,140; IV,283; S.I,126; J.I,482; III,213; Nd¹ 144; (parimussati p. hoti, in explⁿ of mussati) Vism.54; PvA.131; ThA.204; DA.I,30. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricakkhitar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. pari+cakṣ, cp. akkhi & cakkhu] one who looks round or enquires, neg. a° J.V,77. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricarati: {'def': '[pari+carati] to move about, in var. senses, viz. 1. to go about, look after A.III,94 (upaṭṭhahati+) J.V,421; PvA.175. -- 2. to worship (only in connection aggin p. to worship the fire) D.I,101; S.I,166; Dh.107; J.I,494; Sn.p. 79 (=payirupāsati SnA 401). -- 3. to roam about, to feast one’s senses, to amuse oneself, play, sport PvA.77 (indriyāni=kīḷāmi Pv.II,1²¹). -- We often find reading pariharati for paricarati, e. g. at DhA.II,232; cp. paricāreti for °hāreti PvA.175; paricaraṇā for °haraṇā PvA.219. -- pp. pariciṇṇa; Caus. paricāreti (q. v.). (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+car+a) ,直译：到处移动(to move about, to go about)。1.服侍，照顾(look after)。2.崇拜(to worship)。3.流浪，感官享受，游戏(to roam about, to amuse oneself, play)。【过】paricari。【独】paricaritvā。pariharati for paricarati; cp. paricāreti for parihāreti; paricaraṇā for pariharaṇā。【过分】pariciṇṇa。【使】paricāreti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paricaraṇa: {'def': '【中】注意，照顾，享乐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pari+car] 1. going about, mode of life DhA.I,382 (gihīnaṁ °ṭṭhānaṁ, v. l. for vicaraṇa°). ‹-› 2. attending to, looking after, worshipping DhA.I,199 (aggi-p°-ṭṭhāna fire-place). -- 3. enjoyment, pleasure (indriyānaṁ) PvA.16. See also paricāraṇā. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricaraṇaka: {'def': '[fr. paricaraṇa] servant, attendant DA.I,269. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricariyā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paricarati] going about, service, ministration, worship S.I,182; A.I,132; DhA.II,232 (aggi°). Occurs also as pāricariyā (q. v.), e. g. at J.V,154. See also paricārikā. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricaya: {'def': '[fr. pari+ci] familiarity, acquaintance J.VI,337; Vism.153; PvA.74. -- adj. (-°) acquainted with, versed in (Loc.) J.II,249 (jāta°), VvA.24 (kata°); PvA.4 (id.), 129 (id.). (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】练习，熟悉，相识。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paricca: {'def': '【独】辨别了，了解了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [ger. of pari+i, cp. Sk. (Gr.) parītya & P. pariyeti] lit. “going round,” i. e. having encircled, grasped, understood; grasping, finding out, perceiving; freq. in phrase cetasā ceto paricca (pajānāti) grasping fully with one’s mind, e. g. at D.I,79; M.I,445; III,12; S.II,121, 233; It.12; Vbh.329; Vism.409 (=paricchinditvā). See pariyeti. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariccajana: {'def': '【中】pariccāga,【阳】放弃，抛弃，赠予，出家。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) & °nā (f.) [fr. pariccajati] 1. giving up, rejection, leaving It.11, 12. -- 2. giving out, bestowing, giving a donation PvA.124. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariccajanaka: {'def': '[fr. prec.] one who gives (up) or spends, a giver, donor PvA.7. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariccajati: {'def': '[pari+cajati of tyaj] to give up, abandon, leave behind, reject S.I,44; It.94; J.II,335; VI,259 (=chaḍḍeti) Miln.207; DhA.IV,204; PvA.121, 132, 221 (read jīvitaṁ pariccajati for parivajjati; cp. BSk. jīvitaṁ parityakṣyāmi AvŚ I.210); Sdhp.539. -- pp. pariccatta (q. v.). (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+caj +a), 放弃，遗弃，残留，授予。【过】pariccaji。【过分】pariccatta。【现分】pariccajanta 。【独】pariccajitvā。【不】pariccajituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariccatta: {'def': '(pariccajati的【过分】)，已放弃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pariccajati; cp. BSk. parityakta in meaning “given to the poor” AvŚ I.3] given up, abandoned, thrown out, left behind J.I,69, 174, 477; Miln.280; PvA.178, 219 (=virādhita); Sdhp.374. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricchada: {'def': '[fr. pari+chad] a cover, covering J.I,341, 466. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricchanna: {'def': '[pari+channa, pp. of chad] enveloped, covered, wrapped round Vin.IV,17. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paricchādeti的【过分】) , 已遮遍，已包装。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariccheda: {'def': '[fr. pari+chid; late Sk: (philos.) in same meaning] 1. exact determination, circumscription, range, definition, connotation, measure J.III,371; Vism.184 (as one of the nimittas of the body), 236 (referring to the 5 nimittas of the life-principle); SnA 160, 229, 231, 376, 408, 503; KhA 182 (gaṇana°); VvA.194 (id.); DhsA.3; DhA.II,73 (avadhi°); PvA.254 (kāla°), 255 (āyuno p.); VbhA.417 (citta°, for citta-paricce ñãṇa Vbh.330). -- 2. limit, boundary Miln.131, 405; J.III,504 (°nadī-tīra). -- 3. limitation, restriction DhA.II,88, 98; PvA.20 (°ṁ karoti to restrict). -- 4. division (of time), in ratti° & divā°, night- & day-division Vism.416. -- 5. (town)--planning, designing VbhA.331. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+chid),【阳】1.测定，(章节的)章，尺寸(exact determination, circumscription, range, definition, connotation, measure)。2.界限，边界(limit, boundary)。3.限制，约束(limitation, restriction)。4.区分(division (of time), in rattipariccheda夜分 & divāpariccheda日分)。5.计划((town)--planning, designing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paricchedaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pariccheda] determining, fixing VbhA.346 (uṭṭhāna-velā °ā saññā). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pariccheda,【形】决定(determining, fixing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paricchedarūpa: {'def': '【中】界限色；28种色法之一。「界限色」有时译作「虚空界」(ākāsadhātu)，但是它不是单纯的虚空，而是色聚与色聚紧邻的空隙。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paricchindana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paricchindati] “cutting up,” definition, analysis VvA.114. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】定义，划线分出，限制，分析。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paricchindanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pari+chind] marking out, defining, analysing, DhsA.157 (ñāṇa). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricchindati: {'def': '(pari+chid+ṁ-a) 划线分出，限制，定义。【过】paricchindi。【过分】paricchinna。【独】paricchindiya, paricchijja。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+chindati] 1. to mark out VvA.291 (vasana-ṭṭhānaṁ). -- 2. to determine, to fix accurately, to decide J.I,170 (padaṁ the track), 194 (nivāsavetanaṁ); III,371; IV,77; Miln.272; Vism.184, 409; SnA 434 (paññāya p.). -- 3. to limit, restrict, define Miln.131; DA.I,132. -- pp. paricchinna (q. v.). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricchinna: {'def': '[pp. of paricchindati] 1. restricted, limited, small DhA.I,58; PvA.136 (°ppamāṇa). -- 2. divided, measured Vism.184; PvA.185 (=mita). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricchādanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pari+chad] covering, hiding, concealing Pug.19=23=Vbh.358. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】完全封蔽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paricchāta: {'def': '[pari+chāta] very much seared, scorched (?) Sdhp.102 (°odara-ttaca). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariccāga: {'def': '【阳】捐赠物，慈善。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pariccajati] 1. giving up, abandonment, sacrifice, renunciation A.I,92 (āmisa° & dhamma° material & spiritual); Ps.II,98; J.I,12 (jīvita°); DhA.III,441 (pañca mahāpariccāgā the five great sacrifices, i. e. the giving up of the most valuable treasures of wife, of children, of kingdom, of life and limb). -- 2. expense DhA.II,231 (sahassa° expenditure of a thousand coins). -- 3. giving (to the poor), liberality DhsA.157; SnA 295 (mahā°, corresponding to mahādāna); PvA.7 sq.; 27, 120 sq., 124. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricita: {'def': '² [pp. of pari+ci, ciketi, P. cināti; but perhaps identical with paricita¹] known, scrutinized, accustomed, acquainted or familiar with, constantly practised Vin.II,95 (vācasā p.), 109 (aggi° etc. read aggiparijita); ThA.52; Miln.140 (iddhipādā p.); Dāvs.IV,19. --aparicita unfamiliar DhA.I,71. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of pari+ci, cinoti, P. cināti] gathered, accumulated, collected, increased, augmented M.III,97; S.I,116; II,264; IV,200; A.II,67 sq., 185; III,45, 152; IV,282, 300; V,23; Th.1, 647; Ps.I,172 (expl^d); PvA.67; Sdhp.409. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariciṇṇa: {'def': '[pari+ciṇṇa, pp. of carati] 1. surrounded, attended J.V,90. -- 2. worshipped M.I,497; S.IV,57 (me Satthā p.), cp. Th.1, 178 (Satthā ca p. me) & 891 (p. mayā Satthā). -- 3. practised, performed Miln.360. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'paricita (paricināti的【过分】) , 已熟练，已参加，已知晓，已累积，已习惯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paricumbati: {'def': '[pari+cumbati] to kiss (all round, i. e. from all sides), to cover with kisses M.II,120; S.I,178, 193; A.IV,438; DhA.I,330. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+cub+ṁ-a) ,满吻。【过】paricumbi。【过分】paricumbita。(缺【独】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paricāra: {'def': 'fr. [paricāreti] serving, attendance; (m.) servant, attendant Th.1, 632 (C. on this stanza for paddhagū). (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricāraka: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. paricāreti] attending, serving honouring; (m.) attendant, worshipper, follower (cp. BSk. paricāraka attendant AvŚ I.170; II,167] D.I,101; II,200; Th.1, 475; Sn.p. 218 (Nd² reads °cārika); J.I,84; IV,362; Pv IV.8⁷ (not °vāraka); DA.I,137, 269. See also paricārika. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】服务，照顾。【阳】仆人，服务员。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paricāraṇa: {'def': '【中】照顾，款待。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paricāraṇā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paricāreti] care, attention, looking after; pleasure, feasting, satisfaction Pv.II,1² (gloss for °cārika); PvA.219. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricāreti: {'def': '[Caus. of paricarati] 1. to serve, wait on, attend upon, honour, worship [cp. BSk. paricārayati Divy 114 sq., 421] S.I,124 (pāde); DhA.III,196 (id.); J.I,81 (°cāritabba-ṭṭhāna place of worship); IV,274; V,9. ‹-› Pass. paricāriyati, ppr. °iyamāna M.I,46, 504; J.I,58. In this sense it may also be taken as “being delighted or entertained by.” -- 2. to amuse oneself, gratify one’s senses, to have recreation, find pleasure [cp. BSk. paricārayati Divy 1, and freq. phrase pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samarpitā samaṅgibhūtā p. e. g. MVastu I.32] Vin.II,290; III,72 (pañcahi kamaguṇehi samappitā etc.); D.I,36 (id.), 104 (id.); M.I,504 (id.); Th.1, 96 (saggesu); Pv.I,11⁶ (=yathā sukkhaṁ cārenti indriyāni PvA.58); IV,1²⁹ (read °cārayanti for °vārayanti, cp. PvA.228 indriyāni p.). -- pp. paricārita q. v. See also parivāreti. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paricarati 的【使】) , 服侍，等候，消遣。【过】paricāresi。【过分】paricārita。【独】paricāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paricārika: {'def': '【中】女仆人，妻子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.)=paricāraka (servant, attendant) A.V,263 (aggi° fire-worshipper); Pv.II,6²⁰ (amacca° minister & attendant); ThA.267; SnA 597. -- f. °carikā (1) a maid-servant, handmaiden, nurse, (personal) attendant M.I,253; cp. S.I,125; J.I,204 (pāda°), 291; II,395; IV,35 (veyyāvacca-kārikā p.), 79; V,420; Pv.II,12⁶ (=veyyāvacca-kārinī PvA.157); PvA.46. -- (2) care, attention; pleasure, pastime (so here, probably another form of paricāriyā) Pv IV.1² (=indriyānaṁ pariharaṇā PvA.219; gloss °cāraṇā). (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricārin: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. paricāreti] serving, attending, f. a maid-servant J.II,395. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paricārita: {'def': '[pp. of paricāreti] served by; delighted by, indulging in M.I,504. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridahana: {'def': '【中】穿著，给自己穿著。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paridahati: {'def': '(pari++dah放置+a), 穿上，给穿上，给自己穿上。【过】paridahi。【过分】paridahita。【独】paridahitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+dahati, of dhā] to put round, put on, clothe Dh.9 (fut. °dahessati); J.II,197; V,434 (ger. °dahitvā); VI,500; Pv.II,1¹⁸; PvA.76 (vatthāni), 77, 127 (°dahissati for paridhassati Pv.II,9³⁶, which read for T. parivassati). ger also paridayha J.V,400 (=nivāsetvā cp pārupitvā ca C.). -- pp. paridahita (q. v.). ‹-› Caus. II. paridahāpeti to cause to be clothed PvA.49 (=acchādeti). (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridahita: {'def': '[pp. of paridahati] put round, put on (of clothing) PvA.43. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridamana: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+damana] controlling, taming Vism.375. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridameti: {'def': '[pari+dameti] to control, tame, keep under Vism.376. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridayhana: {'def': '【中】烧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paridayhati: {'def': '(pari+dah放置+ya), 被燃烧，被使烧焦。【过】paridayhi。【过分】parinata。【独】paridayhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paridaṇḍa: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+daṇḍa] “with a stick around,” i. e. surrounded by a stick; only in one phrase viz. “saparidaṇḍā iṭṭhi” a woman protected by a stick, or liable to punishment (?), in stock phrase enumerating 10 kinds of women M.I,286=III,46=Vin.III,139=A.V,264= VvA.73. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariddava: {'def': '[according to Trenckner M.I,532 (on M.I,56, where SS read p., whereas BB have parideva) the metrical substitute for parideva; therefore not=Sk. paridrava, which is only a late re-translation of the P. word]=parideva M.I,56 (soka°); A.I,221; Th.2, 345 (soka°); Sn.1052, cp. Nd² 416 (see parideva). (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parideva: {'def': '(pari+deva of dev),【阳】悲叹(wailing)，哀悼(lamentation)。M.10./I,62.︰“Katamo ca, bhikkhave, paridevo? Yo kho, bhikkhave, aññataraññatarena byasanena samannāgatassa aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa 1ādevo 2paridevo 3ādevanā 4paridevanā 5ādevitattaṁ 6paridevitattaṁ, ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, paridevo. (复次，诸比丘！什么是‘悲’呢？诸比丘！凡是俱有种种不幸，为种种苦法所恼的1悲(m.)、2悲痛(m.)、3叹息(f.)、4悲哀(f.)、5悲叹(n.)、6悲怆(n.)，诸比丘！这称为‘悲’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+deva of div, devati; only in one passage of Epic Sk. (Mbhār. VII.3014); otherwise paridevana nt.] lamentation, wailing M.I,200; S.II,1; III,3 sq.; A.I,144; II,195; Sn.328, 592, 811, 923, 969; J.I,146; VI,188, 498; Nd¹ 128, 134, 370, 492; Ps.I,11 sq., 38, 59, 65; Vbh.100, 137; Nett 29. It is exegetically paraphrased at D.II,306=Nd² 416 (under pariddava) with synonyms ādeva p. ādevanā paridevanā ādevitattaṁ paridevitattaṁ; often comb^d with soka grief, e. g. at D.I,36; Sn.862; It.89; PvA.39, 61. -- Bdhgh at DA.I,121 expl^ns it as “sokaṁ nissita-lālappana-lakkhaṇo p.” (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridevana: {'def': '【阴】悲叹，哀悼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paridevanā: {'def': '(f.)=parideva, Sn.585; Nd² 416 (see under parideva) Pv.I,4³ (=vācā-vippalāpa PvA.18); I,12³; PvA.41. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridevati: {'def': '(pari+dev(梵dev/div)悲痛﹑哀悼+a) , 悲叹，哀悼。【过】paridevi。【过分】。【独】paridevitvā。【现分】paridevanta, paridevamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+devati, div] to wail, lament D.II,158 (mā socittha mā paridevittha); Sn.582, 774=Nd¹ 38 (as °devayati), 166; J.VI,188, 498; PvA.18 (socati+); ger. °devamāna S.I,199, 208; J.V,106; PvA.38, & °devayamāna Sn.583. -- grd. °devaniya Nd¹ 492; SnA 573, & °devaneyya Sn.970 (=ādevaneyya Nd¹ 493). -- pp. paridevita (q. v.). (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridevita: {'def': '【中】悲叹。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of paridevati] lamentation, wailing Sn.590; Pv.I,12³ (=ruditaṁ PvA.63); Miln.148 (kanditap.°-lālappita-mukha). (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridevitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. paridevita] lamentation etc.; only exegetical construction in explⁿ of parideva at D.II,306=Nd² 416. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridhamsaka: {'def': '【形】毁灭性的，破坏性的，毁灭性地说的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paridhaṁsaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paridhaṁsati] destructive, ruinous PvA.15 (°vacano speaking destructively, scandalmonger). (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridhaṁsati: {'def': '[pari+dhaṁsati] to be deprived, to lose, to come to ruin It.90; Miln.249, 265. -- Caus. paridhaṁseti in same meaning at Nd¹ 5. It is almost synonymous with paripatati & parihāyati. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridhota: {'def': '(paridhovati的【过分】)已纯净。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paridhovati] washed, rinsed, cleansed, purified D.I,124. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridhovati: {'def': '[pari+dhovati] to wash (all round), cleanse, clean Vin.I,302. -- pp. paridhota. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+dhov+a), 四处洗，纯净。washes all round; cleanses.【过】paridhovi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paridhāvati: {'def': '[pari+dhāvati] to run about J.I,127 (ādhāvati+), 134 (id.), 158 (id.); II,68 (id.)=ThA.54; V,106. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+dha+a),乱跑。runs about.【过】paridhāvi。【过分】paridhāvita。【独】paridhavitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paridīpaka: {'def': '【形】说明的，照亮的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paridīpeti, cp, dīpaka¹] illuminating, explaining, explanatory SnA 40 (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridīpana: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+dīpana] illuminating, elucidating, explanation Miln.318; KhA 111; SnA 394 sq. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】paridīpanā,【阴】解释，例证。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paridīpanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paridīpeti, cp. paridīpana] explanation, illustration Miln.131. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridīpeti: {'def': '[pari+dīpeti] to make bright, to illustrate, to explain Miln.131; Sdhp.491. -- pp. paridīpita (q. v.). (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+dīp+e), 解释，说明，照明。【过】paridipesi。【过分】paridīpita。【现分】paridipenta。【独】paridipetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paridīpita: {'def': '[pp. of paridīpeti] 1. in flames, set ablaze Th.2, 200 (=punappunaṁ ādīpitatāya p. ThA.170), -- 2. explained, made clear, illuminated Vism.58; KvuA 8; Sdhp.305. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paridūseti: {'def': '[pari+dūseti] to spoil altogether, to ruin, corrupt, defile Sdhp.409. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+dūs+e) 完全破坏。【过】paridūsesi。【过分】paridūsita。【独】paridūsetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parigalati: {'def': '[pari+galati, see gaḷati] to sink down, slip or glide off J.IV,229, 250; V,68. (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parigaṇhana: {'def': '【中】调查(investigation)，理解(comprehension)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. parigaṇhāti] comprehension J.II,7 (°paññā comprehensive wisdom). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parigaṇhāti: {'def': '(& Pariggaheti Caus.) [pari+gṛh] 1. to embrace, seize, take possession of, hold, take up M.I,80, 137; J.III,189; DA.I,45. -- 2. to catch, grasp DhA.I,68. -- 3. to go all round DhA.I,91 (sakala-jambudīpaṁ). -- Caus. °ggaheti (aor. °esi, ger. °etvā, inf. °etuṁ) 1. to embrace, comprehend, fig. master Vin.II,213; J.II,28; III,332; SnA 549 (mantāya); DhA.III,242; PvA.68 (hattesu), 93; VvA.75. -- 2. to explore, examine, find out, search J.I,162; II,3; III,85, 268 (°ggahetuṁ), 533; V,93, 101; DhA.II,56. -- Caus. II. parigaṇhāpeti J.I,290. -- 3. to comprise, summarise KhA 166, 167. -- pp. pariggahita (q. v.). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+gah拿+ṇā) ,探究，调查，搜寻，占有，了解。【过】parigaṇhi。parigaggahita。【现分】parigaṇhanta。【独】parigaṇhitvā, parigaṇhetvā﹐pariggayha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariggaha: {'def': '【阳】著手进行，拥有，获得，掌握，财产，妻子。摄受。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pari+gṛh] 1. wrapping round, enclosing Th.1, 419 (? cp. Brethren 217 n. 6). -- 2. taking up, seizing on, acquiring, acquisition, also in bad sense of “grasping” Sn.779 (=taṇhā and diṭṭhi° Nd¹ 57); Ps.I,172; II,182 (nekkhamma° etc.); Nd¹ 11 (itthi° acquiring a wife); J.VI,259; Miln.244 (āhara° abstinence in food), 313 (id.). -- 3. belongings, property, possessions D.II,58; III,289=A.IV,400; M.I,137 (quoted at Nd¹ 122); S.I,93; Sn.805; J.IV,371; VI,259; PvA.76 (°bhūta belonging to, the property of); VvA.213, 321. sa° with all (its) belongings S.I,32. -- 4. a wife ThA 271; PvA.161 (kata° wedded), 282; ThA.271. sapariggaha›apariggaha married›unmarried (in general, with ref. to the man as well as the woman) D.I,247; J.IV,190; VI,348, 364. -- 5. grace, favour DA.I,241 (āmisa° material grace). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariggahita: {'def': '(parigaṇhti的【过分】) ,已拥有，已占有，已占领。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of parigaṇhāti] taken, seized, taken up, haunted, occupied Vin.III,51 (manussānaṁ p. by men); IV,31, 278; DhA.I,13 (amanussa° by ghosts); PvA.87, 133; Sdhp.64. -- f. abstr, °tā being possessed (Vism.121 (amanussa°). (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariggāhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pariggaha] including, occupying Nett 79 (=upathambhaka C. as quoted in Index p. 276). (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parigha: {'def': '[Vedic parigha, of which the usual P. representative is paligha (q. v.)] a cross-bar ThA.211 (°daṇḍa). (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parighaṁsati: {'def': '[pari+ghaṁsati¹] to rub (too) hard, scrub, scratch, only in ppr. aparighaṁsanto Vin.I,46; II,208. (Page 424)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parigilati: {'def': '[pari+gilati] to swallow J.I,346. (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+gil+a) ,吞下。【过】parigili。【过分】parigilita。【独】parigilitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parigūhanā: {'def': '【阴】藏，隐蔽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. patigūhati] hiding, concealment, deception Pug.19, 23. (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parigūhati: {'def': '[pari+gūhati] to hide, conceal A.I,149; IV,10, 31; Pv III,4³ (=paṭicchādeti PvA.194). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+gūh+a) 藏，隐藏。【过】parigūhi。【过分】parigūhita, parigūḷha。【独】parigūhitvā, parigūhiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariharaka: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pari+hṛ] 1. surrounding or surrounded, having on one’s hands J.II,190 (sukha°, v. l. for °parihaṭa). -- 2. an armlet, bracelet VvA.167 (v. l. °haraṇa; expl^d as hatthâlaṅkāra.) See also parihāraka. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariharati: {'def': '(parihārati, parihīrati) (pari遍+har拿+a), 持续，保护，随身携带，避免。【过】parihari。【过分】pariharita, parihaṭa。【独】pariharitvā。【义】paritabba。【3复.祈】pariharantu。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+hṛ] 1. to take care of, to attend to (Acc.), shelter, protect, keep up, preserve, look after Vin.I,42; II,188; D.II,100 (saṅghaṁ); D.II,14 (gabbhaṁ kucchinā); M.I,124, 459; S.III,1; A.III,123; J.I,52 (kucchiyā), 143, 170; Miln.392, 410 (attānaṁ) 418; SnA 78; DhA.II,232 (aggiṁ, v. l. paricarati, which is the usual); PvA.63 (kucchiyā), 177. Cp. BSk. pariharati in same meaning e. g. AvŚ I.193, 205. -- 2. to carry about D.II,19 (aṅkena); M.I,83; Sn.440 (muñjaṁ parihare, 1 sg. pres. med.; SnA 390 takes it as parihareyya); Miln.418 (āḷakaṁ p.). -- 3. (intrs.) to move round, go round, circle, revolve M.I,328; A.I,277 (candima-suriyā p.; cp. A.V,59)=Vism.205; J.I,395; IV,378; VI,519; DA.I,85; PvA.204. -- 4. to conceal Vin.III,52 (suṅkaṁ). ‹-› 5. to set out, take up, put forward, propose, only in phrase (Com. style) uttān’atthāni padāni p. to take up the words in more explicit meaning SnA 178, 419, 437, 462. -- pp. parihaṭa. Pass. parihīrati (q. v.). -- See also anupariharati. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari + har + a), 持续，保护，随身携带，避免。【过】 ~hari。【过分】 ~harita, ~haṭa, 【独】 ~haritvā。【潜】 ~ritabba。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pariharaṇa: {'def': '【中】pariharaṇā,【阴】保持，保护，注意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 Pariharaṇā, 【阴】保持，保护，注意。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pari+hṛ] 1. protection, care Vism.500 (gabbha°); KhA 235; DA.I,207 (kāya°); DhA.II,179 (kāyassa). -- 2. keeping up, preservation, keeping in existence; in phrase khandha° DhA.III,261, 405. Cp. foll. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariharaṇā: {'def': '(f.) [=pariharaṇa] 1. keeping up, preserving, care, attention, pleasure PvA.219 (with v. l. °caraṇā; for paricārikā Pv IV.1²). -- 2. keeping secret, guarding, hiding, deceiving Vbh.358=Pug.23. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariharitabbatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. grd. of pariharati] necessity of guarding Vism.98. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihasati: {'def': '[pari+has] to laugh at, mock, deride J.I,457. ‹-› Caus. parihāseti to make laugh J.V,297. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari + has + a), 笑，嘲笑，嘲弄。【过】 ~hasi。【独】 ~sitvā。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari遍+has笑+a), 笑，嘲笑，嘲弄。【过】parihasi。【独】parihasitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parihaṭa: {'def': '(°hata) [pp. of pariharati] surrounded by (-°) encircled; only in phrase sukha-parihaṭa (+sukhe ṭhita) steeped in good fortune Vin.III,13 (corr. sukhedhita accordingly!); J.II,190 (pariharaka v. l. BB); VI,219 (=sukhe ṭhita). (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihaṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of pari+hṛṣ] gladdened, very pleased PvA.13. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihiyyati: {'def': '[Pass. of parihāyati, Sk. °hīyate] to be left, to be deserted, to come to ruin (=dhaṁsati) J.III,260. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihāna: {'def': '(‹pari+hā减少)【阴】损失(diminution)，减少(decrease)，浪费掉(wasting away)，毁灭(decay)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pari+hā] diminution, decrease, wasting away, decay S.II,206 sq.; A.II,40 (abhabbo parihānāya), III,173, 309, 329 sq., 404 sq. (°dhamma); V,103 (id.), 156 sq.; It.71 (°āya saṁvattati); Dh.32 (abhabbo p. °āya); Pug.12, 14. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihāni: {'def': '【阴】损失，减少，浪费掉，毁灭。D.16./II,77.︰“Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū apaññattaṁ na paññapessanti, paññattaṁ na samucchindissanti, yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya vattissanti, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.”(又，诸比丘！只要诸比丘依照未制立者不制立，已制立者不废，实行所制立律法，诸比丘！则应预期诸比丘之兴盛而非衰亡。)(七不退法之一)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】损失，减少，浪费掉，毁灭。 ~niya, 【形】引起损失或毁灭。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. pari+hā] loss, diminution (opp. vuddhi) S.II,206; IV,76, 79; V,143, 173; A.I,15; III,76 sq.; IV,288; V,19 sq., 96, 124 sq.; J.II,233; DhA.III,335; IV,185. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihāniya: {'def': '(adj.) [parihāna+ya] connected with or causing decay or loss D.II,75 sq. (°ā dhammā conditions leading to ruin); A.IV,16 sq.; Vbh.381; VbhA.507 sq. -- a° S.V,85. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】引起损失或毁灭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parihāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. of parihāyati] 1. to let fall away, to lose, to waste S.II,29; J.IV,214 (vegaṁ); Miln.244 (cittaṁ to lose heart, to despair); PvA.78. -- 2. to set aside, abandon, neglect, omit Vin.I,72 (rājakiccaṁ); J.II,438; IV,132 (vaṭṭaṁ); V,46; Miln.404 (mūḷakammaṁ). -- Neg. ger. aparihāpetvā without omission DhsA.168; ppr. aparihāpento not slackening or neglecting Vism.122. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari + ha + āpe), 使缩小，带来毁灭，疏忽，省略。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~hāpita。【独】 ~petvā。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari遍+hā减少+āpe), 使缩小，带来毁灭，疏忽，省略。【过】parihāpesi。【过分】parihāpita。【独】parihāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parihāra: {'def': '【阳】照料，注意，保护，避免，尊严，防范。 ~ka, 【形】保护的，保卫的。 ~patha, 【阳】环行道，圆形的道路。 ~rika, 【形】维持，持续。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】照料，注意，保护，避免，尊严，防范。parihāraka,【形】保护的，保卫的。parihārapatha,【阳】环行道，圆形的道路。parihārika,【形】维持，持续。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pari+hṛ, cp. pariharati] 1. attention, care (esp. --°), in cpds. like gabbha° care of the fœtus DhA.I,4; dāraka° care of the infant J.II,20; kumāra° looking after the prince J.I,148, II.48; DhA.I,346; dup° hard to protect J.I,437; Vism.95 (Majjhimo d. hard to study?) -- 2. honour, privilege, dignity Vin.I,71; J.IV,306 (gārava°). -- 3. surrounding (lit.), circuit of land J.IV,461. -- 4. surrounding (fig.), attack; in cpd. visama° being attacked by adversities A.II,87; Nd² 304^Ic; Miln.112, 135. -- 5. avoidance, keeping away from J.I,186.

--patha “circle road,” i. e. (1) a roundabout way DhA.II,192. (2) encircling game D.I,6=Vin.II,10 (expl^d as “bhūmiyaṁ nānāpathaṁ maṇḍalaṁ katvā tattha pariharitabbaṁ pariharantānaṁ kīḷanaṁ” DA.I,85; trsl^d as “keeping going over diagrams” Dial. I.10, with remark “a kind of primitive hop-scotch”). (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihāraka: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. pari+hṛ] surrounding, encircling; a guard A.II,180. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihārika: {'def': '[fr. parihāra] keeping, preserving, protecting, sustaining D.I,71 (kāya° cīvara, kucchi° piṇḍapāta; expl^d as kāya-pariharaṇa-mattakena & kucchi° at DA.I,207; correct reading accordingly); M.I,180; III,34; Pug.58; Vism.65 (kāya°, of āvara). (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihārin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. parihāra] taking care of, (worth) keeping S.IV,316 (udaka-maṇika). (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihāsa: {'def': '【阳】笑，嘲弄。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】笑，嘲弄。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pari+has, cp. parihasati] laughter, laughing at, mockery J.I,116 (°keḷi), 377; DhA.I,244. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihāsiṁsu: {'def': 'at J.I,384 is to be read °bhāsiṁsu. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihāyati: {'def': '(pari + hā + ya), 缩小，浪费掉，从…消失。【过】 ~hāyi。【过分】 parihīna。【现分】 ~pāyamāna。【独】 ~hāyitvā。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pari+hā] to decay, dwindle or waste away, come to ruin; to decrease, fall away from, lack; to be inferior, deteriorate Vin.I,5; M.III,46 sq. (opp. abhivaḍḍhati); S.I,120, 137; III,125; IV,76 sq.; A.III,252; Dh.364; Sn.767; J.II,197; IV,108; Nd¹ 5 (paridhaṁsati+) Miln.249 (id.); Pug.12 (read °hāyeyya for °hāreyya); SnA 167 (+vinassati); PugA 181 (nassati+); PvA.5, 76 (v. l.), 125 (°hāyeyyuṁ). -- pp. parihīna, Pass. parihiyyati, Caus. parihāpeti (q. v.). (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari遍+hā减少+ya), 缩小，浪费掉，从…消失。【过】parihāyi。【过分】parihīna。【现分】parihāpāyamāna。【独】parihāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parihīna: {'def': '[pp. of parihāyati] fallen away from, decayed; deficient, wanting; dejected, destitute S.I,121; A.III,123; Sn.827, 881 (°pañña); J.I,112, 242; IV,200; Nd¹ 166, 289; Miln.249, 281 (a°); PvA.220 (=nihīna). (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(parihāyati 的【过分】), 已从…消失，已困穷，已瘦弱。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(parihāyati 的【过分】), 已从…消失，已困穷，已瘦弱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parihīnaka: {'def': '(adj.) [parihīna+ka] one who has fallen short of, neglected in, done out of (Abl. or Instr.) D.I,103. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parihīrati: {'def': '[Pass. of pariharati, Sk. parihriyate in development °hriyate›*hiriyati›*hiyirati›°hīrati] to be carried about (or better “taken care of,” according to Bdhgh’s explⁿ SnA 253; see also Brethren 226) Sn.205 =Th.1, 453. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parijana: {'def': '(pari+jana；“the people round”) ,【阳】随行人员、随扈(retinue)，从者(followers)，随从(attendants)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+jana] “the people round,” i. e. attendants, servants, retinue, suite Vin.I,15; J.I,72, 90; DhA.III,188; VvA.63; PvA.58, 62. --saparijana with one’s servants Cp II.8² (T. saparijjana metri causâ). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parijanana: {'def': '【中】parijānanā(pari+jānanā=jānana) ,【阴】知识，认识(cognition, recognition, knowledge)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parijapana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. parijapati] mumbling, uttering spells Miln.356 (mantaṁ). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parijapati: {'def': '[pari+japati, cp. BSk. parijapta enchanted Divy 397] to mutter (spells), to practise divination J.III,530; Miln.200 (vijjaṁ). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parijegucchā: {'def': '(f.) [pari+jegucchā] intense dislike of, disgust with (-°) D.I,25, cp. DA.I,115. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parijita: {'def': '[pp. of pari+ji, jayati; Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading parijīta, Sk. form of P. parijīna, pp. of pari+ jīyati, but hardly necessary, see also Vin. Texts III,75] overpowered, injured, damaged Vin.II,109 (so read for paricita). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parijiṇṇa: {'def': '[pp. of pari+jar, i. e. decayed; Kern Toev. s. v. proposes reading °jīna of ji, i. e. wasted, see parijīyati] worn out, gone down, decayed, reduced J.I,111 (seṭṭhi-kulaṁ p.); V,99, 100 (bhoga°); VI,364; Dh.148; DhA.II,272 (°kula). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parijjanā: {'def': 'is doubtful reading at A.III,38 (v. l. parivajjanā) =IV.266 (T. reads parijjana, cp. parijana; vv. ll. parivajjanā & parijanā); meaning?. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parijjiṇṇa: {'def': '(Parijjīyati的【过分】)，已磨破，已衰退。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parijjīyati: {'def': '﹐磨破，衰退。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parijānanā: {'def': '(f.) [pari+jānanā=jānana] cognition, recognition, knowledge Nett 20 (as paraphrase of pariññā). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parijānāti: {'def': '[pari+jānāti] to know accurately or for certain, to comprehend, to recognise, find out M.I,293; S.I,11, 24; II,45, 99, III,26, 40, 159; IV,50; V,52, 422; A.III,400 sq.; Sn.202, 254, 943; Nd¹ 426; J.IV,174; Th.1, 226; Miln.69; DhA.IV,233 °jānitvā). -- ppr. parijānaṁ S.III,27; IV,89; It.3 sq. -- pp. pariññāta (q. v.). ger. pariññāya see under pariññā¹. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+ñā+nā) 遍知(完全知道)，肯定，了解。【过】parijāni。【过分】pariññāta。【现分】parijananta﹐parijānaṁ。【独】parijānitvā, pariññāya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parijīyati: {'def': '[pari+jīyati] to become worn out, to decay, fade, S.I,186; J.IV,111. Spelt °jiyyati at Th.1, 1215. ‹-› pp. parijīna (see parijiṇṇa). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikamma: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+kamma] “doing round,” i. e. doing up, viz 1. arrangement, getting up, preparation Vin.II,106 (°ṁ kārāpeti), 117 (geruka° plastering with red chalk) 151 (id.). parikammaṁ karoti to make (the necessary) preparation, to set to work Vism.395 and passim (with ref. to iddhi). Usually in form parikammakata arranged, prepared Vin.II,175 (bhūmi), as --° “with,” viz. geruka° plastered with red chalk Vin.I,48; II,209; lākhā° J.III,183; IV,256; su° beautifully arranged or prepared, fitful, well worked Miln.62 (dāru), 282 (maṇiratana); VvA.188. In special sense used with ref. to jhāna, as kasiṇa° processes whereby jhāna is introduced, preparations for meditation J.I,141; IV,306; V,162, 193; DhsA.168; cp. Cpd. 54; DhA.I,105. -- 2. service, attention, attending Vin.I,47; II,106, 220; S.I,76; Th.2, 376 (=veyyāvacca ThA.253); Pug.56; DhA.I,96, 333, chiefly by way of administering ointments etc. to a person, cp. J.V,89; DhA.I,250. sarīra° attending the body DA.I,45, 186; SnA 52.

--kāraka one who ministers to or looks after a person, attendant; one who makes preparations Th.2, 411 (f. --ikā=paricārikā ThA.267); J.I,232. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】安排，准备，初步行动，涂抺灰泥(arrangement; preparation; prelimenary action; plastering)。parikammakata,【形】抺以泥灰的。parikammakāraka,【阳】准备者。Vibhv.(PTS:p.197；CS:p.257)︰Bhāvanāya paṭisaṅkhārakammabhūtā, ādikammabhūtā vā pubbabhāgabhāvanā parikammabhāvanā nāma.(一再回到原本的工作(禅修对象)的修习，或初始原本工作的前分修习(前方便)，称为遍作修习。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikanta: {'def': '² at Vin.II,80 (bhāsita°) is probably to be read as pārikata [pp. of parikaroti]. Bdhgh expl^ns as parik‹-› kametvā kata, but it is difficult to derive it fr. parikkamati. Vin. Texts III,18 trsl. “as well in speech as in act” and identify it with parikanta¹, hardly justified. Cp. also Kern. Toev. s. v. The passage is evidently faulty. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pari+kanta² of kantati²] cut open Vin.III,89 (kucchi p.). See also parikatta & cp. Kern, Toev. s. v. (misreading for °katta?). -- Note. Reading parikantaṁ upāhanaṁ at J.VI,51 is with v. l. to be changed to pariyantaṁ. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikantati: {'def': '(pari+kant+a) , 切开、割破(cuts open or through)。【过】parikanti。【过分】parikantita。【独】parikantitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pari+kantati¹] to wind round, twist J.III,185 (pāso pādaṁ p.; but taken by C. as parikantati², expl^d as “cammādīni chindanto samantā kantati”). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pari+kantati²] to cut (round), cut through, pierce M.I,244 (vātā kucchiṁ p.); J.III,185 (see parikantati¹). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikappa: {'def': '[fr. pari+kalp] 1. preparation, intention, stratagem Th.1, 940. -- 2. assumption, supposition, surmise A.I,197; V,271; DhsA.308. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】意图(intention)，假定(assumption)，想像(supposition)。DhsA.(PTS:598；CS:597)︰Sace taṁ rūpaṁ cakkhussa āpāthaṁ āgaccheyya, cakkhumhi paṭihaññeyya taṁ rūpanti ayamettha parikappo.(假如色进入眼的范围，於眼(净色)当摄取色，於此，这称为‘取像’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikappeti: {'def': '(pari+kap+e)计划(intends)，推测(surmises)，推想(supposes)。【过】parikappesi。【过分】parikappita。【独】parikappetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikappita: {'def': '[pp. of parikappati] inclined, determined, decided, fixed upon Sdhp. 362, 602. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikara: {'def': '[fr. pari+kṛ; a similar formation belonging to same root, but with fig. meaning is to be found in parikkhāra, which is also expl^d by parivara cp. parikaroti=parivāreti] “doing round,” i. e. girdle, loincloth J.IV,149; DhA.I,352. -- In cpd. ovāda° it is v. l. SS at D.I,137 for paṭikara (q. v.). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikaroti: {'def': '[pari+kṛ] to surround, serve, wait upon, do service for J. IV 405 (=parivāreti C.); V, 353 (id.), 381; VI,592. Cp. parikara & parikkhāra. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikassati: {'def': '[pari+kṛṣ, cp BSk. parikarṣayati to carry about Divy 475, and parikaḍḍhati] 1. to drag about S.I,44, cp. DhsA.68. -- 2. sweep away, carry away DhA.II,275 (mah’ogho viya parikassamāno, v. l. °kaḍḍhamāno). -- Pass. parikissati (q. v.). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+kas+a), 牵引(drags about)，扫掉，倒退。【过】parikassi。【过分】parikassita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikathā: {'def': '(f.) [pari+kathā, cp. BSk. parikathā Divy 225, 235] 1. “round-about tale,” exposition, story, esp religious tale D.II,204; Vism.41 (=pariyāya-kathā) -- 2. talk about, remark, hint Vin.I,254 (cp. Vin. Texts II.154); Vbh.353=Vism.23 (with obhāsa & nimitta); SnA 497. -- 3. continuous or excessive talk Vism.29. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】说明(exposition)，介绍(an introduction)，迂回地谈话(round-about talk)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikati: {'def': '[*parikṛti of kṛ (?)] arrangement, preparation, getting up J.V,203. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikatta: {'def': '[pp. of pari+kantati²; corresponds to Sk, kṛtta, which is usually represented in P. by kanta²] cut round, cut off Miln.188. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikaḍḍhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. prec.] drawing, dragging along J.II,78; Miln.154. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】曳(drawing over)，拖拉(dragging)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】拖拉(drawing, dragging along J.II,78; Miln.154.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikaḍḍhati: {'def': '(pari+kaḍḍh+a；cp. BSk. parikaḍḍhati), 拉过来(draws over or towards oneself)，拖拉(drags)，赢(to win over)，引诱(seduce)。【过】parikaḍḍhi。【过分】parikaḍḍhita。【独】parikaḍḍhitvā。cp. parikassati and samparikaḍḍhati.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+k°, cp. BSk. parikaḍḍhati MVastu II.255] to draw over or towards oneself, to win over, seduce D.II,283 (purisaṁ); Miln.143 (janapadaṁ). Cp. parikassati and samparikaḍḍhati. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikeḷanā: {'def': '(f.) [pari+keḷanā] adornment, adorning oneself, being fond of ornaments Nd² 585² (v. l. parilepanā); DA.I,286 has paṭikelanā instead, but Vbh.id. p. 351 parikeḷanā with v. l. parikelāsanā. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikhaṇati: {'def': 'paḷikhaṇati, (pari+khan+a)到处挖。【过】parikhaṇi。【过分】parikhata。【独】parikhaṇitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikhā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pari+khan, cp. Epic Sk. parikhā] a ditch, trench, moat Vin.II,154; D.I,105 (ukkiṇṇa-parikha adj. with trenches dug deep, comb^d with okkhittapaligha; expl^d by khāta-parikha ṭhapita-paligha at DA.I,274); M.I,139 (saṅkiṇṇa° adj. with trenches filled, Ep. of an Arahant, comb^d with ukkhittapaligha)=A.III,84 sq.= Nd² 284 C (spelt kkh); A.IV,106 (nagara°); J.I,240, 490; IV,106 (ukkiṇṇ’antaraparikha); VI,276, 432; Cp II.1³ (spelt kkh); Miln.1 (gambhīra°); SnA 519 (°taṭa); PvA.201 (°piṭṭhe), 261 (id.), 278 (id., v. l. °parikkhāṭa-tīre). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】沟渠(a ditch)，壕沟(a moat)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikhīyati: {'def': '(pari+khīyati of ksi2)﹐已耗尽(to go to ruin, to be wasted or exhausted )(=parikhayaṁ gacchati)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikilamati: {'def': '[pari+kilamati] to get tired out, fatigued or exhausted J.V,417, 421. -- pp. parikilanta (q. v.). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+kilam+a) , 非常疲倦，被耗尽，疲劳。【过】parikilami。【独】parikilamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikilanta: {'def': '(parikilamati的【过分】) 已被耗尽，已疲劳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of parikilamati] tired out, exhausted Miln.303. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikilesa: {'def': '[pari+kilesa] misery, calamity, punishment ThA.241 (for °klesa, q. v.). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikilinna: {'def': '【过分】已沾染，已弄脏，已肮脏已弄湿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikilissana: {'def': '【中】杂质。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikilissati: {'def': '[pari+kilissati] to get stained or soiled; fig. get into trouble or misery (?) see parikissati. -- pp. parikiliṭṭha see parikkiliṭṭha. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+kilis+ya), 沾染，弄脏，招致不幸(gets stained or soiled; gets into trouble)。【过】parikilissi。【独】parikilissitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikiliṭṭha: {'def': '(parikilissati的【过分】) 已沾染，已弄脏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikirati: {'def': '[pari+kirati] to strew or scatter about, to surround S.I,185=Th.1, 1210; aor. parikiri J.VI,592 (v. l. for parikari, see parikaroti). -- pp. parikiṇṇa (q. v.). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+kir+a), 散布，包围。parikittita﹐scatters about; surrounds.【过】parikiri。【过分】parikiṇṇa。【独】parikiriya, parikiritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikiraṇa: {'def': '[fr. pari+kirati] strewing about, trsl^d “consecrating sites” D.I,12 (vatthu-kamma+vatthu°; v. l. paṭi°; expl^d at DA.I,98 as “idañ c’idañ ca āharathā ti vatvā tattha balikamma-karaṇaṁ”). The BSk. form appears to be parīkṣā, as seen in phrase vatthuparīkṣā at Divy 3 & 16. See under parikkhā. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikissati: {'def': '[most likely Pass. of parikassati; maybe Pass. of kisa (=Sk. kṛśa) to become emaciated. Mrs. Rh. D. at K.S. 319 takes it as contracted form of kilissati] to be dragged about or worried, to be harassed, to get into trouble S.I,39 (trsl. “plagues itself”); A.II,177; IV,186; Sn.820 (v. l. Nd¹ °kilissati; expl^d at Nd¹ 154 as kissati parikissati parikilissati, with vv. ll. kilissati pakirissati). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikitteti: {'def': '(pari+katt+e) , 详细说明(expounds)，称赞(praises)，公众化(makes public)。【过】parikittesi。【过分】parikittita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+kitteti] to declare, praise, make public Miln.131, 141, 230, 383. -- pp. parikittita (q. v.). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikittita: {'def': '[pp. of parikutteti] declared, announced, made public Sdhp.601. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikiṇṇa: {'def': '[pp. of parikirati] scattered or strewn about, surrounded J.IV,400; VI,89, 559; Pv.I,6¹ (makkhikā°= samantato ākiṇṇa PvA.32); Miln.168, 285; DA.I,45 (spelt parikkhiṇṇa). Cp. sampari°. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(parikirati的【过分】)散布，包围。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikkamana: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+kram] walking about M.I,43, 44; adj. sa° having (opportunity for) walking about, i. e. accessible, good for rambling in, pleasant, said of the Dhamma A.V,262 (opp. a°). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】在附近的空间，周围的走道，盘旋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikkha: {'def': '(-°) see parikkhā. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhaka: {'def': '【阳】调查员，主考者，检查员。parikkhaṇa,【中】调查，考试。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. parikkhati] investigating, examining, experienced, shrewd PvA.131 (lokiya° experienced in the ways of the world, for agarahita). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhata: {'def': '(parikhaṇati的【过分】) 1.挖出。2.受伤。3.准备，装备。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [pp. of *parikkharoti; cp. Sk. pariṣkṛta] made up, prepared, endowed with, equipped, adorned D.II,217; M.III,71; Miln.328. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of pari+kṣan] wounded, hurt, grazed J.III,431; PvA.272 (a°). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhatatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. parikkhata²] “making up,” pretence, posing, sham Pug.19 (23)=Vbh.351 (358). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhati: {'def': '(pari+ikkh见+a), 检查，调查。【过】parikkhi。【过分】parikkhita。【独】parikkhipitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+īkṣ] to look round, to inspect, investigate, examine A.I,162 (vaṇṇaṁ parikkhare 3^rd pl.). See also parikkhaka, parikkhavant & parikkhā. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhattiya: {'def': 'read pāri° (=parikkhatatā) q. v. *Parikkharoti [pariṣ+kṛ] lit. to do all round, i. e. to make up, equip, adorn (cp. parikaroti); pp. parikkhata² (q. v.); see also parikkhāra. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. parikkhati] circumspect, elever, experienced J.III,114. (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhaya: {'def': '(pari遍+khaya尽),【阳】遍尽，疲惫，废物，衰退，损失。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pari+kṣi², cp. Epic Sk. parikṣaya] exhaustion, waste, diminution, decay, loss, end D.I,156; M.I,453; III,37 sq.; S.I,2, 90, 152; V,461; A.I,100, 299; II,68; III,46 (bhogā °ṁ gacchanti); IV,148, 350; Th.1, 929; Sn.374, 749, 1094 (=pahānaṁ etc. Nd² 412); Dh.139; J.I,290; Pv.II,6¹⁵; Pug.16, 17, 63; Miln.102; DhA.IV,140 (°ṁ gacchati to come to waste, to disappear= atthaṁ gacchati of Dh.384); ThA.285; PvA.3 (dhanasannicayo °ṁ na gamissati). In the latter phrase freq. comb^d with pariyādāna (q. v.). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. parikkhati; cp. Class. Sk. parīkṣaṇa] putting to the test, trying Sdhp.403 (sarīra°, or should we read parirakkhaṇa? Cp. parirakkhati). (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhepa: {'def': '[fr. pari+ kṣip] 1. closing round, surrounding, neighbourhood, enclosure Vin.IV,304; J.I,338; IV,266; SnA 29 (°dāru etc.). -- 2. circumference J.I,89; V,37; Vism.205; KhA 133; SnA 194. -- 3. “closing in on,” i. e. fight, quarrel It.11, 12. (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】围住(enclosure)，围(closing round)，圆周(circumference)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikkhipati: {'def': '(pari+khip抛+a), 环绕，包围。encircles; surrounds.【过】parikkhipi。【现分】parikkhipanta。【独】parikkhipitvā。【潜】parikkhipitabba。【使】parikkhipāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+ kṣip] to throw round, encircle, surround Vin.II,154; J.I,52 (sāṇiṁ), 63, 150, 166; II,104; III,371; DhA.I,73. -- pp. parikkhitta (q. v.). -- Caus. II. parikkhipāpeti J.I,148 (sāṇiṁ); II,88 (sāṇi-pākāraṁ). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhitta: {'def': '(parikkhipati的【过分】)已环绕，已包围。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of parikkhipati] thrown round, overspread, overlaid, enclosed, fenced in, encircling, surrounded by (-°) M.III,46; A.IV,106 (su°); S.I,331 (read valligahana°); Pv IV.3³⁶ (v. l. for pariyanta as in I.10¹³); Vism.71 (of gāma); ThA.70; DhA.I,42 (pākāra°); PvA.52 (=pariyanta I.10¹³), 283 (sāṇī-pākāra°); Sdhp.596. (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhiṇṇa: {'def': 'at DA.I,45 is to be read parikiṇṇa (q. v.). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhā: {'def': '参考parikkhaṇa。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. pari+īkṣ, cp. BSk. parīksā Divy 3 & 16 in vastu°, ratna° etc. with which cp. P. vatthu-parikirana] examination, investigation, circumspection, prudence J.III,115; Nett 3, 4, 126 (cp. Index p. 276); Sdhp. 532 (attha°). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhāra: {'def': '(‹*parikkharoti, cp. late Sk. pariskāra),【中】必需品，资粮，零件，仪器，器具( requisite, accessory, equipment, utensil, apparatus)。sakaparikkhāraparaparikkhāra(saka-parikkhāra-para-parikkhāra)﹐自物.他物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. *parikkharoti, cp. late Sk. pariṣkāra] “all that belongs to anything,” make-up, adornment (so Nd² 585 bāhirā p. of the body). -- (a) requisite, accessory, equipment, utensil, apparatus Vin.I,50, 296 (°colaka cloth required for water-strainers & bags, cp. Vin. Texts II.229); II,150 (senāsana°-dussa clothrequirement of seat & bed); IV,249 sq., 284; D.I,128, 137 (yaññassa p.=parivāra DA.I,297); M.I,104 (jīvita°); III,11; S.II,29; A.IV,62 (citt’ālaṅkāraṁ citta-parikkhār’atthaṁ dānaṁ), 236 (id.); J.III,470 (sabba°-sampannaṁ dānaṁ with all that belongs to it); V,232; Sn.307; Nd² 585; Nett 1 sq.; 4, 108; DA.I,294, 299; DhA.I,38, 240 (geha°), 352 (v. l. for parikara); PvA.81 (sabba°). --saparikkhāra together with the (other) requisites, i. e. full of resources; used with reference to the samādhiparikkhārā (see below) D.II,217; M.III,71. -- (b) In a special sense and in very early use it refers to the “set of necessaries” of a Buddhist monk & comprises the 4 indispensable instruments of a mendicant, enum^d in stock phrase “cīvara-piṇḍapāta-senāsana-gilānapaccayabhesajja-p.” i. e. robe, alms-bowl, seat & bed, medicine as help in illness. Thus freq. found in Canon, e. g. at Vin.III,132; D.III,268; S.IV,288, 291; Nd² 523 (as 1^st part of “yañña”); also unspecified, but to be understood as these 4 (different Vin Texts III,343 which take it to mean the 8 requisites: see below) at Vin.II,267. -- Later we find another set of mendicants’requisites designated as “aṭṭha parikkhārā,” the 8 requirements. They are enum^d in verse at J.I,65= DA.I,206, viz. ticīvaraṁ, patto, vāsi, sūci, (kāya-) bandhanaṁ, parissāvana, i. e. the 3 robes, the bowl, a razor, a needle, the girdle, a water-strainer. They are expl^d in detail DA.I,206 sq. Cp. also J.IV,342 (aṭṭhaparikkhāra-dhara); V,254 (kāyabandhana-parissāvanasūci-vāsi-satthakāni; the last-named article being “scissors” instead of a razor); DhA.II,61 (°dhara thera). -- (c) In other comb^ns: satta nagara° A.IV,106 sq. (cp. nagarûpakārikā D.I,105); satta samādhi° D.II,216; M.III,71; A.IV,40; soḷasa° (adj.) of yañña: having sixteen accessories D.I,134 (cp. Dial. I.174, 177), bahu° having a full equipment, i. e. being well-off Vin.III,138; J.I,126. -- Note. A set of 12 requisites (1--8 as under b and 4 additional) see detailed at DA.I,207. (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhārika: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. parikkhāra] one who has the parikkhāras (of the mendicant). Usually the 8 p. are understood, but occasionally 12 are given as in the detailed enumⁿ of p. at DA.I,204--207. (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhīyati: {'def': '[pari+khīyati of kṣi²] to go to ruin, to be wasted or exhausted Th.2, 347 (=parikhayaṁ gacchati ThA.242). -- pp. parikkhīṇa (q. v.). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkhīṇa: {'def': '[pp. of parikkhīyati] exhausted, wasted, decayed, extinct Vin.IV,258; M.III,80; S.I,92; II,24; V,145, 461; D.III,97, 133 (°bhava-saṁyojana); It.79 (id.); A.IV,418, 434 (āsavā); Sn.175, 639, 640; Dh.93; Pug.11, 14; Miln.23 (°āyuka); PvA.112 (°tiṇodak’‹-› āhāra). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(parikhīyati的【过分】) ,已耗尽。aparikkhīṇa, 未耗尽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikkhīṇatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. of parikkhīṇa] the fact of being exhausted, exhaustion, extinction, destruction DA.I,128 (jīvitassa); PvA.63 (kammassa), 148 (id.). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkiliṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of parikilissati] soiled, stained Vin.II,296 (for parikiliṭṭha, cp. Kern, Toev. s. v.); id. p, at A.II,56 has paṭikiliṭṭha, cp. upakkiliṭṭha Vin.II,295. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikkita: {'def': 'at J.V,74 is probably to be read parikkhita (pari+ukṣ): see okkhita “sprinkled, strewn,” unless it is misreading for parikiṇṇa. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariklesa: {'def': '[pari+klesa] hardship, misery, calamity S.I,132 =Th.2, 191; Th.2, 345 (=parikilesa ThA.241). (Page 423)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】艰难(hardship)，不纯(impurity)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parikopeti: {'def': '(pari+kup+e) 非常兴奋，生气。【过】parikopesi。【过分】parikopita。【独】parikopetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pari+kup] to excite violently Miln.253. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikujati: {'def': 'at Sdhp.145, meaning? Cp. palikujjati. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikupita: {'def': '[pp. of pari+kup] greatly excited, very much agitated A.II,75; Miln.253. (Page 422)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parikuppati: {'def': '(pari+kup+ya) 感到兴奋，很激动(is excited or much agitated)。【过】parikuppi。【过分】parikupita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parillaka: {'def': '[cp. Sk. pirilī, pirillī Bṛh. Saṁh. 86, 44] N. of a bird (C. on Th.1, 49). (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. pirilī, pirillī Brh. Saṁh. 86, 44) 一种鸟(of a bird) (ThA.1, 49).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parima: {'def': '=parama (cp. Geiger P.Gr. 19¹) M.III,112. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimaddana: {'def': '【中】摩擦，压碎，征服，按摩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pari+mṛd] rubbing, kneading, shampooing, massage; usually in stock phrase (kāyo) anicc’--ucchādana-parimaddana-bhedana-viddhaṁsanadhammo D.I,76 (cp. DA.I,88, but trsl^d at Dial. I.87 as “subject to erasion, abrasion, dissolution and disintegration”); M.I,500; S.IV,83; J.I,416. See further D.I,7; A.I,62; IV,54 (ucchādana-p.-nahāpana-sambāhana); Miln.241 (ucchādana°); Sdhp.578. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimaddati: {'def': '[pari+mṛd] 1. to rub, crush, rub off, treat, shampoo, massage J.IV,137 (sarīraṁ examine the body); Miln.241. -- Of leather (i. e. treat) M. I.128. -- 2. to go together with, to frequent DhA.I,90 (samayaṁ p.). -- pp. parimaddita (q. v.). (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+madd(梵mrd)压碎+a) ,擦，压破，按摩(to rub, crush, rub off, treat, shampoo, massage)。【过】parimaddi。【过分】parimaddita。【独】parimadditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parimaddhita: {'def': '[pp. of pari+maddheti, Caus. of mṛdh to neglect] brought to an end or standstill, destroyed J.I,145 (°saṅkhāra). (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimaddita: {'def': '[pp. of parimaddati] crushed, rubbed, treated M.I,129 (su° well-treated). (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimajjaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pari+marj] touching, reaching (up to) Miln.343 (candasuriya°, cp. MVastu II, candramasūrya-parimārjako maharddhiko etc.). (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. pari+marj(梵mrj)擦),【形】触及，到达(touching, reaching (up to))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】擦者，抚摸者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parimajjana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. parimajjati] 1. wiping off or out Pug.33 (ukkhali°). -- 2. rubbing, grooming (a horse) A.V,166, 168 (ājānīya°). (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. parimajjati),【中】1.擦，拭掉(wiping off or out, Pug 33︰ ukkhaliparimajjanaṁ, 擦锅)。2.擦，扫(rubbing, grooming (a horse))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parimajjati: {'def': '[pari+majjati] 1. to wipe away, wipe off or out M.I,78. -- 2. to touch, stroke D.I,78; M.III,12; S.II,121; Dh.394; J.I,192, 305; II,395 (piṭṭhiṁ). -- 3. to rub, polish, groom (a horse) A.V,166, 168. -- pp. parimaṭṭha (q. v.). (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+majjati‹ maj) 1.拭去，拭掉(to wipe away, wipe off or out)。2.触，抚摸，击打(to touch, stroke)。3.擦，擦亮，扫(to rub, polish, groom (a horse))。【过】parimajji。【过分】parimajjita, parimaṭṭha。【独】parimajjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parimandalaṁ: {'def': '【副】整个围绕著。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parimasati: {'def': '[pari+mṛś] to touch, stroke, grasp (usually comb^d with parimajjati), D.I,78; II,17; M.I,34, 80; III,12; S.II,121; IV,173; A.III,70. -- pp. parimaṭṭha (same as pp. of parimajjati), q. v. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+ mas(梵mrw)+a),接触，碰触(to touch, stroke, grasp)。pp. parimaṭṭha (same as pp. of parimajjati)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parimaṇḍala: {'def': '【形】【阳】圆的，圆形的，给人深刻印象的。Parimaṇḍalaṁ nivāsessāmī’ti, sikkhā karaṇīyā.(「我要圆整地整齐穿好(内裙)」，应当学)(比丘守则七十五应学法的第一条)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pari+maṇḍala] 1. round, circular J.I,441; II,406 (āvāṭa); VI,42; Pv IV.3²⁸ (guḷa°); Dhs.617 (expl^d at DhsA.317 as “egg-shaped,” kukkuṭ-aṇḍasaṇṭhāna). -- nt. as adv. in phrase °ṁ nivāseti to dress or cover oneself all round Vin.I,46; II,213; IV,185 (= nābhimaṇḍalaṁ jānu-maṇḍalaṁ paṭicchādentena C.; cp. timaṇḍala). -- 2. rounded off, i. e. complete, correct, pleasant, in phrase °āni padavyañjanāni well sounding words and letters, correct speech Vin.II,316; M.I,216; A.I,103; DA.I,282; SnA 177, 370. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimaṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of parimajjati] rubbed, stroked, polished, in su° well polished S.II,102. See also palimaṭṭha. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimeyya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of parimināti] to be measured, neg. a° countless, immeasurable Miln.331, 388; PvA.212. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimināti: {'def': '[pari+mā] to measure, mete out, estimate, limit, restrict; inf. °metuṁ Miln.192; ThA.26; and °minituṁ Miln.316; grd. °meyya (q. v.). -- pp. parimita (q. v.). (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimita: {'def': '(parimiṇāti的【过分】) ,已测量，已限制，已约束。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of parimināti] measured, restricted, limited, only in neg. a° measureless Pv.II,8¹¹; Miln.287, 343. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. parimita] the condition of being measured PvA.254. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimoceti: {'def': '[Caus. of parimuccati] to set free, deliver, release D.I,96; J.I,28 (V. 203); Miln.334; DA.I,263; DhA.I,39. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+muc释放+e) 释放，解脱。【过】parimocesi。【过分】parimocita。【独】parimocetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parimohita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of pari+Caus. of muh] very confused, muddled, dulled, bewildered, infatuated Sdhp.206. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimuccana: {'def': '【中】释放，逃亡。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parimuccati: {'def': '(pari+muc释放+ya) ,被释放，逃脱。【过】parimucci。【过分】parimutta。【独】parimuccitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Pass. of pari+muc] to be released, to be set free, to escape Vin.II,87; M.I,8; S.I,88, 208; II,24, 109; III,40, 150, 179; Miln.213, 335 (jātiyā etc.) aor. °mucci M.I,153. -- pp. parimutta; Caus. parimoceti (q. v.). (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimukha: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+mukha] facing, in front; only as nt. adv. °ṁ in front, before, in phrase parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapeti “set up his memory in front” (i. e. of the object of thought), to set one’s mindfulness alert Vin.I,24; D.II,291; M.I,56, 421; S.I,170; A.III,92; It.80; Ps.I,176 (expl^d); Pug.68; DA.I,210. Also in phrase °ṁ kārāpeti (of hair) Vin.II,134 “to cut off (?) the hair in front” (i. e. on the breast) Vin. Texts III,138, where is quoted Bdhgh’s explⁿ “ure loma-saṁharaṇaṁ.” (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimukhaṁ: {'def': '(pari遍+mukha口、面),【副】在前面( in front of)；鼻端，鼻子正下方人中或它的附近部位上的任何一处。都可作为专注入、出息所依靠的接触点。ujuj kāyaṁ paṇidhāya, parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā.(使身正直，起正念於鼻端。《中阿含经》作：正身正愿，反念不向)。《分别论》Vibh.p.294﹐#537. “Parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā”ti tattha katamā sati? Yā 1sati 2anussati 3paṭissati[sati 4saraṇatā 5dhāraṇatā 6apilāpanatā 7asammusanatā sati 8satindriyaṁ 9satibalaṁ] 10sammāsati--ayaṁ vuccati “sati”. Ayaṁ sati upaṭṭhitā hoti supaṭṭhitā nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā. …”(「使存念於口上(parimukha﹐pari上+ mukha口)」者，此中，什么是「念」(sati)，凡是1念(处在记住)、2随念(一而再地记住)、3回想(当面记住，离去后，再回想)、4记住(免得再记)、5忆持性(听闻与诵习的忆持)、6不漂浮性(溶入所缘)、7不忘性(久做久说都不忘。不失忆性(asammusanatā= naṭṭha-muṭṭhassatitā))、8念根(使作统治的根)、9念力(没有懒惰的摇摆)、10正念(正确的念、有利可图的念、善念)，这被称作「念」，此「念」存续、善存续在鼻端(nāsika-agge)或在口相(mukhanimitte) ，以念住於鼻端被称为「念」的存续之后。)()。DA.2./I,210-1.︰Parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṁ satiṁ ṭhapayitvā. Mukhasamīpevā katvāti attho. Teneva Vibhaṅge vuttaṁ-- “ayaṁ sati upaṭṭhitā hoti sūpaṭṭhitā nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā, tena vuccati parimukhaṁ satiṁ upaṭṭhapetvā”ti (vibha.537). Athavā parīti pariggahaṭṭho. Mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho. Satīti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. (「念」存续於遍口(鼻端)之后︰使念被放置於业处的前面，放置接近於口之意。或然，遍︰掌握之意。口︰释放之意。念︰存续之意。《分别论》说︰此「念」存续、善存续在鼻端(nāsika-agge)或在口相(mukhanimitte))，以念住於鼻端被称为「念」的存续之后。) 《沙门果经》新疏(Dṭ2./pg.2.124)︰Nāsikaggeti nāsapuṭagge. Mukhanimittaṁ nāma uttaroṭṭhassa vemajjhappadeso, yattha nāsikavāto paṭihaññati.：(鼻端︰鼻腔出口。口相︰是上唇的中部，空气出入鼻孔时磨擦之处。) ‘parimukha’ 在此译作：「人中(鼻下沟中，正中上方1/3处)附近」，或「(鼻下)口上」较写实；译：面前、全面、in front、before、facing皆不够精确。「面前」或「前面」，也可用pamukha(pa(梵pra-)先, 前)，或sammukha前面，或paṭimukha对面。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parimussati: {'def': '[pari+mussati] to become bewildered or disturbed, to vanish, fall off Nd¹ 144. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimutta: {'def': '(parimuccati的【过分】)已被释放，已逃脱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of parimuccati] released, set free, delivered S.III,31. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimutti: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pari+muc] release J.I,4 (V. 20); Miln.112, 227; PvA.109. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】释放，解脱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parimuṭṭha: {'def': '[pari+muṭṭha, pp. of mussati, cp. pamuṭṭha] forgetful, bewildered Vin.I,349=J.III,488 (=muṭṭhassati C.); cp. Vin. Texts II.307. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimārita: {'def': '[pp. of pari+māreti, Caus. of mṛ] mortified, only in phrase °indriya J.I,361; III,515; IV,9, 306; V,152; Dāvs.I,16. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parimāṇa: {'def': '(pari+mā),【中】尺寸，范围，界限。【形】(在【合】中)测定，包含，扩充。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [of pari+mā] measure, extent, limit, as adj. (-°) measuring, extending over, comprising J.I,45; SnA 1 (pariyatti°); PvA.113 (yojana°), 102 (anekabhāra°). -- neg. aparimāṇa without limit, immeasurable, very great Vin.II,62, 70; S.V,430; A.II,182; KhA 248; DA.I,288 (°vaṇṇa); PvA.110, 129. (Page 431)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parinama: {'def': '【阳】成熟，变化，发展，消化。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parinaya: {'def': '【阳】婚姻(marriage)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parinibbuta: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+nibbuta] completely calmed, at peace, at rest (as to the distinction of the twofold application see parinibbāna and cp., Mrs. Rh.D. Buddhism p. 191; Cpd. p. 168), viz. -- 1. gone out, or passed away without any remaining cause of rebirth anywhere, completely extinct, finally released (fr. rebirth & trans migration), quite dead or at rest [cp. BSk. parinirvṛta Divy 79]. It is usually applied to the Buddha, or the Tathāgatha, but also to Theras & Arahants who have by means of moral & intellectual perfection destroyed all germs of further existence. With ref. to Gotama Buddha: Vin.II,284 (atikkhippaṁ Bhagavā p.), 294 (vassasata° e Bhagavati); V,119, 120; D.I,204 (acira-°e Bhagavati); S.I,158 (Tathāgato p. II.191); V,172 (°e Tathāgate); Vv III,9⁷ (°e Gotame=anupādisesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā parinibbuto VvA.169); PvA.140 (Satthari p.), 212 (Bhagavati). Of others: S.I,121, 122 (Godhika); III,124 (Vakkali); IV,63 (Puṇṇa); Sn.p. 59, 60 (a Thera); Miln.390 (Arahant); VvA.158; PvA.76; DhA.II,163; IV,42. -- 2. emancipated, quite free (from earthly bonds), calm, serene, at peace, perfected Vin.II,156=A.I,138 “spiritually free” Vin. Texts III,182); D.II,123 (cp. Dial. II.132); III,55; M.I,235; II,102; S.I,1 (+tiṇṇo loke visattikaṁ), 7=IV.179 (aheṭhayāno+); I,54 (+tiṇṇo loke visattikaṁ); 187 (p. kaṅkhati kālaṁ); Sn.359 (+ṭhitatta), 370 (id.), 467 (p. udaka-rahado va sīto); Th.1, 5 (cp. Brethren 11³); J.IV,303, 453; Ud.85 (rāga-dosa-moha-kkhayā p.); Miln.50 (°atta), Freq. in combⁿ with kindred terms like sītibhūta (cooled), e. g. Vin.II,156=A.I,138; Vv 53²⁴; or nicchāta (without hunger), e. g. S.III,26; IV,204= It.46; Sn.735 sq.; It.48 (esanānaṁ khayā), 49 (āsavānaṁ khayā). -- 3. (to be understood as pp. of parinibbāpeti) calmed, well trained, domesticated M.I,446 (of a horse). (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parinibbāna: {'def': '般涅盘[cf. sa-upādisesa-nibbāna有余(依)涅盘;anupādisesa-nibbāna无余(依)涅盘]', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': "'full Nibbāna', is a synonym for Nibbāna; this term, therefore, does not refer exclusively to the extinction of the 5 groups of existence at the death of the Holy One, though often applied to it. Cf. Nibbāna.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '阿罗汉死亡后的状态，一种完全无苦的状态。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '【中】般涅盘，圆寂(阿罗汉最后一生的逝世)。parinibbapāna,【中】完全消失、完全冷却(complete extinction or cooling)。 upahacca-parinibbāna，生般涅盘，三果圣者於欲界死后生至色界时，立即断五上分结而般涅盘。antarāparinibbāna﹐中般涅盘，三果圣者於欲界死后生至色界至寿命的一半，即断灭五上分结而般涅盘。 sasaṅkhāra-parinibbāna﹐有行般涅盘，三果圣者生色界后，努力修行，断五上分结之后而般涅盘。asasaṅkhāra-parinibbāna﹐无行般涅盘，三果圣者於欲界死后生色界，不必加行而断五上分结而般涅盘。Uddhaṁ soto akaniṭṭhagāmī(=uddhaṁsoto hoti akaniṭṭhagāmin)﹐(往)上流阿迦腻吒般涅盘。akaniṭṭha，阿迦腻吒(即指色究竟天)。先往生色界初禅天，渐次上生至色究竟天，於其间久时乃断五上分结而般涅盘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [pari+nibbāna] “complete Nibbāna” in two meanings: 1. complete extinction of khandhalife; i. e. all possibility of such life & its rebirth, final release from (the misery of) rebirth and transmigration, death (after the last life-span of an Arahant). This is the so-called “an-upādi-sesa Parinibbāna,” or “extinction with no rebirth-substratum left.” -- 2. release from cravings & attachment to life, emancipation (in this life) with the assurance of final death; freedom of spirit, calm, perfect well-being or peace of soul. This is the so-called “sa-upādisesa-P.,” or “extinction (of passion) with some substratum left.” -- The two kinds are distinguished by Bdhgh at DhA.II,163 as follows: “arahatta-pattito paṭṭhāya kilesa-vaṭṭassa khepitattā sa -- upādi -- sesena, carima -- citta -- nirodhena khandhavaṭṭassa khepitattā an-upādi-sesena cā ti dvīhi pi parinibbānehi parinibbutā, an-upādāno viya padīpo apaṇṇattika-bhāvaṁ gatā.” -- 1. D.II,72 sq. (the famous Mahā-parinibbāna-suttanta or “Book of the Great Decease”); M.III,127, 128; A.II,79 (°samaye); III,409 (°dhamma, contrasted with āpāyika nerayika, cp. DhA.IV,42); Mhvs 7, 1 (°mañcamhi nipanna); VvA.158; PvA.244. -- 2. D.III,55; A.V,64; Sn.514 (°gata+ vitiṇṇa-kaṅkho); Vv 53²⁴ (°gata+sītibhūta). This state of final emancipation (during life) has also received the determination of anupādā-parinibbāna, i. e. emancipation without ground. for further clinging (lit. without fuel), which corresponds to Bdhgh’s term “kilesavaṭṭassa khepitattā sa-upādi-sesa p.” (see above); thus at M.I,148; S.IV,48; V,29; A.I,44; V,65 (nicchāto nibbuto sītibhūto etc).; A.V,233=253=Dh.89 (+khīṇāsava). (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parinibbānika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. parinibbāna] one who is destined to or that which leads to complete extinction D.III,264; 265 (opasamika+). (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parinibbāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+nibbāpana] refreshing, cooling, quenching; controlling, subduing, training Ps.I,174 (atta-damatha, atta-samatha, atta-p.). (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parinibbāpetar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. parinibbāpeti] one who pacifies, a calmer, trainer M.II,102 (dametar sametar p.). (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parinibbāpeti: {'def': '[pari+nibbāpeti] to bring to complete coolness, or training (see next), emancipation or cessation of the life-impulse, to make calm, lead to Nibbāna, to exercise self-control, to extinguish fever of craving, or fire of rāga, dosa, moha. Always coupled with the quâsi synonyms sameti & dameti (cp. damatha samatha parinibbāpana) D.III,61=A.III,46 (attānaṁ dameti, sameti, p.); M.I,45 (fut. °bbapessati); A.II,68 (attānaṁ d. s. p.). -- pp. parinibbuta (see p. No. 3) & parinibbāpita (only in n. ag. °āpetar, q. v.). (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parinibbāti: {'def': '(pari+ni+va+a)入灭(dies without being reborn(觉悟者)死后不再转世)。【过】parinibbāyi。【过分】parinibbuta。【独】parinibbāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parinibbāyana: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. parinibbāyin] passing away, see parinibbāyin 2 b. (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parinibbāyati: {'def': '(& °nibbāti) [pari+nibb° cp. BSk. parinirvāti Divy 150 (Buddhā Bhagavantaḥ parinirvānti) & ger. parinirvātavya ibid. 402] 1. to be completed, perfected, in any work or art, e. g. of a trained horse, M.I,446. Cp. teleiόw. -- 2. to die without being reborn, to reach complete extinction of existence Vin.II,194 (Tathāgathā °āyanti); M.III,128 (aor °nibbāyi); S.V,152 (°nibbāyeyyaṁ), 261 (°nibbāyissāmi); A.II,120 (anupādisesāya nibbāna-dhātuyā p.); IV,202 (id.), 313 (id.), Miln.175 (id.); J.I,28 (id.), 55 (id.); VvA.158 (fut. °nibbāyissāmi); PvA.21, 283 (of a Paccekabuddha). ‹-› 2. to become emancipated from all desire of life D.II,68 (cp. Dial. II.65 & Brethren 417); S.IV,102 (diṭṭh’eva dhamme), ibid. (sa-upādāno devānaṁ indo na parinibbāyati), 168; A.III,41=Vin.II,148, 164 (parinibbāti anāsavo); A.IV,98 (aor. °nibbiṁsu anāsavā) Th.1, 100 (fut. °nibbissati anāsavo), 364; It.93 (°nibbanti), cp. 95; Dh.126 (°nibbanti anāsavā perhaps better taken to No. 1!); Vbh.426 (sabbāsave pariññāya parinibbanti anāsavā); Sdhp.584 (°nibbanti mahoghen’eva aggino). -- pp. parinibbuto (q. v.). ‹-› Caus. parinibbāpeti (q. v.). (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parinibbāyin: {'def': '[fr. parinibbāyati] one who attains Parinibbāna. Of the 2 meanings registered under parinibbāna we find No. 1 only in a very restricted use, when taken in both senses of sa- and an- upādisesa parinibbāna; e. g. at A.II,155 sq., where the distinction is made between a sa-saṅkhāra p. and an a-saṅkhāra p., as these two terms also occur in the fivefold classification of “Never-returners” (i. e. those who are not reborn) viz. antarā-parinibbāyin, upahacca°, sasaṅkhāra°, uddhaṁsota, akaniṭṭhagāmin. Thus at D.III,237; S.V,201, 237; A.I,233; IV,14, 71 sq., 146, 380; V,120; Pug.16, 17. -- 2. In the sense of Parinibbāna No. 2 (i. e. sa-upādisesa p.) we find parinibbāyin almost as an equivalent of arahant in two combn^s, viz. (a) tattha° (always comb^d with opapātika, i. e. above the ordinary cause of birth) [cp. BSk. tatra-parinirvāyin anāgāmin Divy 533]. It is also invariably comb^d with anāvattidhamma, e. g. at D.I,156; III,108, 132; M.II,56, 146; A.I,232; 245, 290; II,5, 89, 238; IV,12, 399, 423; V,343; S.V,346 (cp. 406), 357; Pug.16, 62, 83. See also Kvu trsl. 74². -- (b) antara° [cp. BSk. antarāparinirvāyin MVastu I.33] one who passes away in the middle of his term of life in a particular heaven; an Anāgāmin (cp. Bdhgh’s explⁿ at PugA 198 as “āyuvemajjhassa antarā yeva parinibbāyanato a. p.”) S.V,69=A.IV,70; S.V,201=204, 237, 285, 314, 378; A.II,134; Ps.I,161; Pug.16; Nett 190 (cp. A.IV,380). (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parinibbāyī: {'def': '﹐【形】入灭者(one who has attained the final release)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parinimmita: {'def': 'at Dhs.1280 read para°. (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parininna: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+ninna] deeply hollowed, sunken Sdhp.103. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parinipphanna: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+nipphanna] predetermined Kvu 459 (v. l. °nibbāna), 626 (a°); cp. Kvu trsl. 261⁶, 368¹. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parinitthāna: {'def': '【中】结束，成就。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parinitthāpeti: {'def': '(pari+ni+ṭhā +āpe) 结束，完成。【过】parinitthapesi。【过分】parinitthapita。【独】parinitthapetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariniṭṭhita: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+niṭṭhita] accomplished M.III,53; Th.2, 283; DhA.II,78. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariniṭṭhāna: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+niṭṭhāna] 1. end PvA.287. ‹-› 2. accomplishment J.V,400. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariniṭṭhāpeti: {'def': '[pari+niṭṭhāpeti] to bring to an end, attain, accomplish DhsA.363. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parināha: {'def': '【阳】周围，尺寸，圆周。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paripaccana: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+paccana] ripening, healing (of a wound) Miln.112. (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripaccati: {'def': '[pari+paccati] to become ripe, to heal (of a wound) Miln.112. (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripakka: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+pakka] 1. (quite) ripe, ripened, matured, developed D.I,54; S.IV,105=DA.I,50; A.IV,357; Dh.260; J.I,91, 231; VI,1 (ap°); Ud.36 (id.); Miln.194, 288; DhA.III,338; KhA 56; ThA.273; PvA.274 (su°). -- 2. overripe, rotten Miln.223. (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paripaccati的【过分】)﹐已相当成熟，已充分地成熟。paripakkavedanīya kamma﹐熟报业，因缘具足已成熟的业报。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paripakkata: {'def': '[pp. of pari+pakkirati] scattered Th.2, 391 (reading doubtful). (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripanna: {'def': 'see palipanna. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripantha: {'def': '[pari+pantha] 1. “way round,” edge, border; paripanthe in ambush (near a road) M.I,87; J.III,65. ‹-› 2. obstacle, hindrance, danger. It refers esp. to danger arising out of mishaps to or bad conditions of roads in the forests. D.I,52; S.I,43; A.I,153; III,252; V,136; Ps.I,162; J.I,395; III,268; IV,17; VI,57 (n. pl. °ayo=kilesaparipanthā C.), 75; DhA.I,14 (magga°), 16 (id.), 51, 69; migānaṁ p. danger to the crops from (the nuisance of) deer J.I,143, 154.-saparipantha full of danger DhA.I,63. See also palipatha. (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】危险，障碍。paripanthika,【形】阻隔的，反对的。corā pāripanthikāti gahetvā sīsacchinnānaṁ lohitaṁ passannaṁ paggharitaṁ.为盗贼拦路(抢劫)而被捕，被砍头流出之血。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paripanthika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paripantha] forming or causing an obstacle A.I,161. The usual form is pāri° (q. v.). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripatati: {'def': '[pari+patati, cp. nipatati] to fall down, to fall off from (Abl.) Vin.II,152 sq.; J.V,417, 420; Pv IV.5³ (bhūmiyaṁ) DA.I,132; PvA.37, 47, 55, 62. -- Caus. paripāteti (q. v.). -- See also paripaṭati. (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Paripaṭati (pari+pat落下+a)跌倒，走向毁灭。【过】paripati。【过分】paripatita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paripañhati: {'def': '[denom. fr. pari+pañha] to question A.V,16. (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripaṭati: {'def': '[doublet of paripatati] to go to ruin, to come to fall, to come to naught Miln.91 (opp. sambhavati); comb^d with paridhaṁsati at Nd¹ 5; Miln.249, 265. (Page 428)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariphandati: {'def': '(pari+phand+a) 战栗，悸动。【过】pariphandi。【过分】pariphandita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+spand] to tremble, quiver, throb, waver Sn.776 (cp. Nd¹ 46 sq.), 1145; Dh.34 (=saṇṭhātuṁ na sakkoti DhA.I,289); J.IV,93; Miln.91, 249. ‹-› pp. pariphandita (q.v.). (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariphandita: {'def': '[pp. of pariphandati] wavered, trembled, quivered J.III,24. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariplava: {'def': '【形】不稳定的，动摇的，背离的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pari+plu] unsteady, wavering, swerving about Dh.38 (=upplavana DhA.I,309). (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariplavati: {'def': '[pari+plu] to quiver, roam about, swerve J.III,484 (ppr. pariplavanto=upplavamāna C. -- pp. paripluta (q. v.). (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+pla+a) ,颤抖，偏斜，到处漫游。【过】pariplavi。【过分】pariplavita 。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paripluta: {'def': '[pp. of pariplavati] immersed, drenched J.VI,78 (=nimugga C.); Dāvs III,34. (Page 430)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripothita: {'def': '[pp. of paripotheti] beaten, whipped Miln.188 (laguḷehi). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parippharati: {'def': '[pari+sphur] to pervade D.I,74 (=samantato phusati DA.I,217); M.III,92 sq. See also paripūreti ‹-› pp. paripphuta & °pphuṭṭha (q. v.). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripphosakaṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [either with Kern. Toev, s. v. ger. of paripphoseti (i. e. paripphosa)+kaṁ or preferably with Trenckner, Notes 80 absolutive in °aka (i. e. nt. formation fr. adj. paripphosa, as phenuddeha+kaṁ etc.). Cp. also Geiger P.Gr. § 62. 1] sprinkled all round D.I,74; M.I,276; II,15; III,92; expl^d as “siñcitvā” at DA.I,218. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripphoseti: {'def': '[pari+Caus. of pruṣ] to sprinkle over, Vin.II,209 (udakena °pphositvā; so read for °ppositvā); A.I,257; J.VI,566; Pv III,10² (°itvā=āsiñcitvā PvA.231). -- pp. paripphosita (q. v.). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripphosita: {'def': '[pp. of paripphoseti] sprinkled all round J.VI,51, 481 (candana sāra°). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripphuṭa: {'def': '(paripūreti的【过分】)已充满，已遍及。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paripphuṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of parippharati] filled, pervaded D.I,75; M.III,94 (spelt here paripphuta). Cp. BSk. parisphuṭa MVastu II.349; III,274; Lal. Vist. 33, 385. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripucchaka: {'def': '【形】发问者，调查者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pari+pṛch] asking a question, enquiring Nd¹ 234=Nd² 386; Sdhp.90. -- f. abstr. paripucchakatā questioning Vism.132 (one of the 7 constituents of dhamma-vicaya-sambojjhaṅga). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripucchati: {'def': '[pari+pucchati] to ask a question, to interrogate, inquire Vin.I,47=224; II,125; S.I,98; A.V,16; Sn.380, 696 (°iyāna ger.), 1025; Pug.41; Miln.257, 408; SnA 111. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+pucch询问+a)﹐质问，查究。【过】paripucchi。【过分】paripucchita, pariputtha。【独】paripucchitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paripucchā: {'def': '(pari+pucchā),【阴】问题，审问，遍问(完全的研究与讨论疑难)(question, interrogation)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [pari+pucchā] question, interrogation Vin.I,190 (uddesa+); II,219 (id.); A.I,285; Nd¹ 234 =Nd² 386 (cp. SnA III). See also uddesa. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripuñchati: {'def': '[pari+puñchati] to wipe off, stroke down Vin.III,14 (pāṇinā gattāni p.). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripuṇṇa: {'def': '(paripūrati的【过分】) ,已相当满，已实现，已完全，已完美。paripuṇṇaviriya﹐卯足全力的精进。paripuṇṇatā,【阴】满，完全。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of paripūrati] 1. (quite) full, fulfilled, complete, finished, satisfied M.I,200 (°saṅkappa), III,276; S.II,283; IV,104; V,315; Ps.I,172 (=pariggah’aṭṭhena parivār’aṭṭhena, paripūr’aṭṭhena p., i. e. acquiring, keeping, fulfilling); Sn.889 (°mānin=samatta-mānin Nd¹ 298), 904; It.40 (°sekha); Pv IV.16³; Vism.45 (°saṅkappa): PvA.13, 54 (°vassa whose years are completed, i. e. old enough for ordination), 68 (°gabbha ready to be delivered), 77 (vārinā). -- 2, complete, i. e. not defective, perfect, sound, healthy Sn.548 (°kāya= lakkhaṇehi puṇṇatāya ahīn’aṅga-paccaṅgatāya ca paripuṇṇa-sarīro SnA 452); Miln.249. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripuṇṇatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. paripuṇṇa] fullness, completeness SnA 452. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripācana: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+pācana¹] ripening, maturing, digestion Vims 351, 363, 365. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】成熟，发展。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paripācaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paripācana] bringing to maturity, leading to perfection, accomplishing, only in phrase vimuttiparipācaniyā dhammā (5) things achieving emancipation (see Ud.36) S.IV,105=DA.I,50; ThA.273. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripāceti: {'def': '[pari+pāceti, Caus. of pacati] to bring to maturity, to cause to ripen, to develop, prepare J.VI,373 (atthaṁ p. °ācayitvā=vaḍḍhetvā C.); Miln.232, 285, 288, 296. -- pp. paripācita Vism.365. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+pac+e)﹐使成熟，发展，斡旋。【过】paripacesi。【过分】paripacita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paripāka: {'def': '[fr. pari+pac] 1. ripeness, maturity, development, perfection D.I,9 (cp. DA.I,94); Ud.36 (pañca dhammā paripākāya saṁvattanti); J.I,142, 148; VI,236; Miln.288; Vism.116 (bodhi°), 199; DhA.I,89 (°gatatta nt. state of perfection); ThA.79; PvA.276. -- 2. overripeness, decay, collapse, only in phrase “indriyānaṁ p.,” i. e. decay of the (mental) faculties, in formula defining jarā (old age) at D.II,305; M.I,49; S.II,2, 42 sq.; A.V,203; Nd² 252; Dhs.644; cp. BSk. indriyaparipāka AvŚ II.110. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】成熟，发展。sattva-paripāka, sattva-paripācanatā,【梵】成熟有情。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paripāleti: {'def': '(pari+pal +e)﹐保护，保卫，看守。protects; guards; watches.【过】paripalesi。【过分】paripalita。【独】paripaletvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+pāleti] to watch, guard (carefully) PvA.130 (=rakkhati). -- pp. paripālita (q. v.). -- Pass. °pāliyati Nett 105 (=rakkhitaṁ). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripālita: {'def': '[pp. of paripāleti] guarded Vism.74. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripāteti: {'def': '(pari+pat落下+e)﹐攻击，跌倒，杀，带来毁灭。【过】paripatesi。【过分】paripatita。【独】paripatetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(or °pāṭeti) [Caus. of paripatati. Cp. BSk. paripāṭayati to destroy Divy 417] to cause to fall down, to bring to ruin, to attack, pursue Vin.IV,115; J.II,208; III,380; Miln.279, 367; KhA 73 (see App. II. p. 353 n. 9).-- pp. paripātita (q. v.). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripātita: {'def': '[pp. of paripāteti] attacked, pursued, brought into difficulty VvA.336. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripīleti: {'def': '(pari+pīḷ虐待+e),压迫。oppresses.【过】paripīlesi。【过分】paripīlita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paripīta: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+pīta] very dear, highly valued Sdhp.571. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripīḷita: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+pīlita, pp. of pīḍ] oppressed, vexed, injured Miln.97 (aggi-santāpa-pariḷāha°), 303 jighacchāya). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripūra: {'def': '【形】满的，完全的。paripūraka,【形】装满者，实践者。paripūrakārita,【阴】完成。【阳】完成者，实践者。paripūraṇa,【中】实践，完美。DA.21./III,706.︰Sīlesu paripūrakārinīti pañcasu sīlesu paripūrakārinī.(於戒圆满︰圆满五戒者。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pari+pṛ] full, complete, perfected, accomplished D.I,75; I,133; III,94; S.II,32; IV,247; V,269 (f. °ī); A.II,77; V,10 sq.; Sn.205, 1017; Ps.I,15, 18, 49, 172; II,122; Pug.35, 36. --aparipūra not completed, imperfect, incomplete A.II,77; IV,314 sq.; V,10 sq; It.107; Pug.35, 36.

--kāritā completion M.I,64, 66 sq. --kārin completing, fulfilling, making complete, doing to the full M.I,33 sq., 64; S.V,201; A.II,136; III,215; IV,380; V,131 sq.; Pug.37; Miln.243. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripūraka: {'def': '(adj.( (-°) one who fills, filling Vism.300 (niraya°). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripūrati: {'def': '(pari+ pūr(梵pr / prṇ/ pūr)充满+a),变成充满，变成完美。【过】paripūri。【过分】paripuṇṇa。【独】paripūritvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+pūrati] to become full or perfect Dh.38; J.IV,273 (devaloko p.); Miln.395 (sāmaññaṁ); fut. paripūrissati DhA.I,309. -- Pass. paripūriyati to be fulfilled or perfected DhA.I,309. -- pp. paripuṇṇa (q. v.). -- Caus. paripūreti (q. v.). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripūratta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. paripūra] fullness, completeness, completion S.V,200 sq. (+samatta). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripūraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paripūreti] fulfilment, completion Vism.3 (sīla°). See pāripūraṇa. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripūreti: {'def': '[Caus. of paripūrati] to fulfil; to fill (up), make more full, supplement, fill out, add to D.I,74 (parisandeti p. parippharati; DA.I,217 expl^ns as “vāyunā bhastaṁ viya pūreti”); II,221; M.III,92; S.I,27 (devakāyaṁ)=30; II,29, 32; III,93 (sāmaññatthaṁ)=A.II,95= It.90; Pv.II,9⁴⁵ (ppr. °ayanto); Pug.31, 35; Miln.349 (lekhaṁ); PvA.29 (sāgaraṁ), 30 (ñātidhammo °pūretabbo), 136 (vassasahassāni); Sdhp.371. -- ppr. med. °pūramāna D.I,103. -- pp. paripūrita (q. v.). (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paripūrati 的【使】)，填充，实践，完成，圆满，遍满。【过】paripūresi。【过分】paripūrita。【现分】paripūrenta。【独】paripūretvā, paripūriya。【潜】paripūretabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paripūrita: {'def': '[pp. of paripūreti] filled (to overflowing), full PvA.216. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paripūrī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paripūra, but better spelt pāripūrī, q. v.] fulfilment, completion S.I,139. (Page 429)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parirakkhana: {'def': '【中】保卫，保护。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parirakkhati: {'def': '(pari+rakkh+a),参考 rakkhati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+rakṣ, cp. abhirakkhati] to guard, protect; preserve, maintain Sn.678 (pot. °rakkhe); Miln.410; Sdhp.413, 553 (sīlaṁ). (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parirakkhaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pari+rakṣ] guarding, preserving, keeping Miln.356, 402; PvA.130. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parirañjita: {'def': '[pari+rañjita] dyed, coloured; fig. marked or distinguished by (Instr.) Miln.75. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisadūsaka: {'def': '【阳】害群之马。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】害群之马。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parisagata: {'def': '【形】加入一个团体的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】加入一个团体的。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parisahati: {'def': '(pari + sah + a), 克服，征服。【过】 ~sahi。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari遍+sah胜过+a), 克服，征服。【过】parisahasahi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+sahati] to overcome, conquer, master, get the better of S.IV,112; exegetically in formula sahati p. abhibhavati ajjhottharati etc. Nd¹ 12, 361 =Nd² 420. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisakkati: {'def': '[pari+sakkati] to go about to (with inf. or Dat.), to endeavour, undertake try Vin.II,18=A.IV,345 (alābhāya); J.I,173 (vadhāya); II,394; Pv IV.5² (=payogaṁ karoti PvA.259). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari + sakk + a), 努力，试。【过】 ~sakki。【过分】 ~sakkita。【动名】 ~sakkana, 【中】。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari遍+sakk +a), 努力，试。【过】parisakki。【过分】parisakkita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parisamantato: {'def': '【副】到处，周围。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [pari+samantato] from all sides VvA.236. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】到处，周围。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parisambāhati: {'def': '[pari+sambāhati] to stroke, to rub from all sides M.II,120; S.I,178, 194; A.V,65. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari遍+saṁ+bāh+a), 完全按摩，完全触摸。【过】parisambāhi。【独】parisambāhitvā。parisambāhanta【现分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parisandeti: {'def': '[pari+Caus. of syad] to make flow round, to make overflow, to fill, in phrase kāyaṁ abhisandeti p. D.I,75, 214; M.III,92 sq. etc. expl^d as “samantato sandeti” at DA.I,217. -- pp. parisanna (q. v.). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisanna: {'def': '[pp. of parisandati, cp. parisandeti] surrounded or filled with water, drenched, well-watered D.I,75= M.III,94. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisappanā: {'def': '【阴】到处爬行，发抖，怀疑，犹豫。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】到处爬行，发抖，怀疑，犹豫(台语：踌躇tiu5 ti5)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. parisappati] running about, fear, hesitation, doubt, always comb^d with āsappanā and only found with ref. to the exegesis of “doubt” (vicikicchā or kaṅkhā) Nd² 1; Dhs.425 (cp. Dhs.trsl. 116 and DhsA.260); DA.I,69. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisappati: {'def': '[pari+sṛp] to run about, crawl about, to be frightened Dh.342, 343 (=saṁsappati bhāyati DhA.IV,49). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari + sap + a), 到处爬行。【过】 ~sappi。【过分】 ~pita。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari遍+sap服务+a), 到处爬行。【过】parisappi。【过分】parisappita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parisarati: {'def': '[pari+ smṛ, but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. pari here fr. Prk. paḍi=Sk. prati, thus for pratismarati] to remember, recollect J.VI,199 (read parissaraṁ). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisaṁsibbita: {'def': '[pari+pp. of saṁsibbati] sewn together, entwined DhA.III,198 (v. l. for saṁsibbita+). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisaṅgāhāpeti: {'def': '[pari+Caus. of saṅgaṇhāti] to induce someone to mention or relate something J.VI,328. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisaṅkati: {'def': '(pari遍+sak+ṁ-a), 怀疑，有忧虑。【过】parisaṅki。【过分】parisaṅkita。【独】parisaṅkitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pari + sak + ŋ-a), 怀疑，有忧虑。【过】 ~saṅki。【过分】 ~kita。【独】 ~kitvā。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pari+saṅkati] to suspect, fear, have apprehension J.III,210, 541; DhA.I,81. -- pp. °saṅkita (q. v.). Cp. āsaṅkati. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisaṅkita: {'def': '[pp. of parisaṅkati] suspecting or suspected, having apprehensions, fearing Vin.II,243 (diṭṭha-suta°); A.III,128; J.IV,214; V,80; Miln.372; DhA.I,223 (āsaṅkita°). -- Cp. āsaṅkita & ussaṅkita. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisaṅku: {'def': 'in Parisaṅkupatha the region round the path of stakes & sticks, N. of a path leading up to Gijjha-pabbata (see explⁿ at J.III,485) J.III,484. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisaṅkā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pari+śaṅk] suspicion, misgiving Vin.IV,314; D.III,218. Cp. āsaṅkā. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】怀疑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】怀疑。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parisaṇha: {'def': '(adj,.) [pari+saṇha] very smooth or soft Miln.198. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisaṇṭhāti: {'def': '[pari+saṇṭhāti] to return into the former state, to be restored; aor. °saṇṭhāsi J.III,341. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisaṭha: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+saṭha] very fraudulent or crafty Pug.23 (saṭha+). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisedeti: {'def': '(pari遍+sid +e), 孵，蒸热。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pari + sid + e), 孵，蒸热。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parisedita: {'def': '[pp. of pari+Caus. of svid, Sk. parisvedita in slightly diff. use] heated, hatched, made ripe M.I,104 (bījāni); S.III,153; Vin.III,3; AIV. 125 (aṇḍāni), 176. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(parisedeti 的【过分】), 已蒸热，已孵。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(parisedeti 的【过分】), 已蒸热，已孵。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parisesa: {'def': '[pari+sesa] remnant, remainder, rest; only neg. aparisesa (adj.) without remainder, complete, entire M.I,92, 110; A.III,166=Pug.64; A.IV,428 (°ñāṇadassana). (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisibbita: {'def': '[pp. of pari+sibbati] sewn round, bordered Vin.I,186; J.V,377. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisiñcati: {'def': '(pari遍+sic倾倒+ṁ-a), 到处洒。【过】parisiñci。【过分】parisitta。【独】parisiñcitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pari + sic + ŋ-a), 到处洒。【过】 ~siñci。【过分】 ~sitta。【独】~ñcitvā。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pari+siñcati] to sprinkle all over, to bathe M.I,161; S.I,8 (gattāni); Sdhp.595. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisodhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. parisodheti] cleansing, purification Miln.215. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】洗净，使净化。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】洗净，使净化。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parisodheti: {'def': '(pari + sudh + e), 使清洁，使清净。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~sodhita。【独】 ~dhetvā, ~sodhiya。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari遍+sudh(梵wudh / wundh)弄乾净+e), 使清洁，使清净。【过】parisodhesi。【过分】parisodhita。【独】parisodhetvā, parisodhiya。【潜】parisodhayi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+Caus. of śudh] to cleanse, clean, purify M.III,3, 35 (aor. °sodhesi); Sn.407 (aor. °sodhayi); DhA.II,162 (vodapeti+). -- Freq. in phrase cittaṁ p. to cleanse one’s heart (from=Abl.) D.III,49; S.IV,104; A.II,211; III,92; Nd¹ 484; Pug.68. -- pp. parisodhita (q. v.). (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisodhita: {'def': '[pp. of parisodheti] cleaned, cleansed, purified Miln.415; Sdhp.414. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisoka: {'def': '[pari+soka] great grief, severe mourning Ps.I,38 (anto° in def. of soka). (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisosa: {'def': '[fr. pari+śuṣ] becoming dried up, dryness, withering away S.I,91. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisoseti: {'def': '(pari遍+sus+e), 弄乾，蒸发。【过】parisosesi。【过分】parisosita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of parisussati] to make dry up, to exhaust, make evaporate (water) Miln.389. -- pp. parisosita (q. v.). (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari + sus + e), 弄干，蒸发。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~sosita。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parisosita: {'def': '[pp. of parisoseti] dried up, withered away Sdhp.9. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parissajana: {'def': '【中】拥抱。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】拥抱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parissajati: {'def': '(pari + saj + a), 拥抱。【过】 ~saji。【过分】 ~jita。【现分】~sajanta。【独】 ~sajitvā。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari遍+saj黏住+a), 拥抱。【过】parissaji。【过分】parissajita。【现分】parissajanta。【独】parissajitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parissama: {'def': '[fr. pari+śram] fatigue, toil, exhaustion, VvA.289, 305 (addhāna° from journeying); PvA.3, 43, 113, 127. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】努力，辛劳，疲劳，疲惫。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】努力，辛劳，疲劳，疲惫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parissanta: {'def': '[pp. of parissamati] tired, fatigued, exhausted Pv.II,9³⁶; VvA.305; Sdhp.9, 101. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已疲累，已疲劳。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已疲累，已疲劳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parissaya: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [fr. pari+śri? Etym. doubtful, cp. Weber, Ind. Streifen III,395 and Andersen, Pāli Reader II.167, 168] danger, risk, trouble M.I,10 (utu°); A.III,388 (id.); Sn.42, 45, 770, 921, 960 sq.; Dh.328 (°ayāni= sīha-vyaggh’--ādayo pākaṭa-parissaye, rāga-bhaya-dosabhay’ādayo paṭicchanna-parissaye DhA.IV,29); Nd¹ 12=Nd² 420 (where same division into pākaṭa° & paṭicchanna°); Nd¹ 360, 365; J.I,418; II,405; V,315, 441 (antarāmagga p. cp. paripantha in same use); Vism.34 (utu°); SnA 88 (expl^d as paricca sayantī ti p.); DhA.III,199 (°mocana); PvA.216, DhsA.330. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】危险，风险，麻烦。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】危险，风险，麻烦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parissañjati: {'def': '(°ssajati?) [pari+svaj] to embrace, enfold, J.I,466; VI,156 (°itvā, v. l. °ssajitvā & palisajjitvā). (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parissuta: {'def': '[pp. of pari+sru] overflowing J.VI,328 (=atipuṇṇattā pagharamāna). (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parissāvana: {'def': '【中】滤水器，过滤器，滤…器。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】滤水器，过滤器，滤…器。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pari+Caus. of sru] a water strainer, filter (one of the requisites of a bhikkhu) Vin.I,209, II.119 and passim; J.I,198; III,377; Nd¹ 226; DhA.III,260 (udaka°); VvA.40, 63; Sdhp.593. (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parissāvanaka: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. parissāvana] only neg. a°: 1. one who has no strainer Vin.II,119; J.I,198. -- 2. not to be filtered, i. e. so that there is nothing left to be filtered J.I,400 (so read for °ssavanaka). Or is it “not overflowing”? (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parissāveti: {'def': '(pari + sav + e), 滤，过滤。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~sāvita。【独】~vetvā。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pari+sru] to strain or filter J.I,198 (pānīyaṁ); DA.I,206 (udakaṁ); III,207 (pānīyaṁ). -- pp. parissāvita (q. v.). (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari遍+sav(梵sru)流动+e), 滤，过滤。【过】parissāvesi。【过分】parissāvita。【独】parissāvetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parissāvita: {'def': '[pp. of parissāveti] strained, filtered J.I,198 (udaka). (Page 438)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisuddha: {'def': '(Parisujjhati的【过分】), 已清理，已纯粹，已完美。tikoṭiparisuddha﹐三际清净(不自作、不教他作、不赞叹作(杀、盗、淫、妄语、离间语、麤恶语、绮语))(S.55.7./V,354~5.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pari+pp. of śudh] clean, clear, pure, perfect Vin.II,237; M.I,26; III,11; S II 199 (°dhammadesanā); III,235; V,301, 354; A.III,125 (°ñāṇa-dassana); IV,120 sq.; J.I,265; Vism.2 (accanta°); Pug.68 (samāhite citte parisuddha); Miln.106; DA.I,177, 219; SnA 445 (apanetabbassa abhāvato niddosa-bhāvena p.); PvA.44, 70. Very freq. comb^d with pariyodāta (q. v.). -- aparisuddha unclean Vin.II,236, M.I,17.

--ājīva (adj.) of pure livelihood D.I,63 (see DA.I,181); A.III,124 (cp. pārisuddhi). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisuddhatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. parisuddha] purity, cleanliness, perfection M.I,36; Miln.103 sq.; Vism.168. -- As f. pari-suddhatā at Vism.30. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisuddhi: {'def': '【阴】纯净，清净。有四遍清净戒(catupārisuddhisīla)：一、别解脱律仪戒(pātimokkhasaṁvarasīla)：比丘守则，共有227戒。二、根律仪戒(indriyasaṁvarasīla)：以正念防护六根，不迎可喜、不拒可厌的对象。三、活命遍净戒(ājīvaparisuddhisīla) ：比丘应以适合的方式活命。四、资具依止戒(paccayasannissitasīla)：使用衣、食、住、药(或必需品)之前、之时、之后，适当地省察运用它们的正确目的。pārisuddhi-uposatha, 清净布萨。pārisuddhi-dāna, 清净布施。 ājīva-pārisuddhi, 生活清净。vacī-pārisuddhi, 语清净。sīla-pārisuddhi, 戒清净。dassana-pārisuddhi, 见清净。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. pari+śudh] purity, purification S.I,169. The usual spelling is pārisuddhi (q. v.). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】纯净，清净。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parisuddhābha: {'def': 'm. 遍浄光 [天].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Parisujjhati: {'def': '(pari遍+sudh(梵wudh / wundh)弄乾净+ya), 变成乾净，使洁净，使净化。【过】parisujjhi。【现分】parisujjhanta。【独】parisujjhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Pass. of pari+śudh] to become clear or clean, to be purified S.I,214; Sn.183, 184. -- pp. parisuddha (q. v.). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari + sudh + ya), 变成干净，被洁净。【过】 ~jjhi。【现分】~jhanta。【独】 ~jhitvā。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parisukkha: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+sukkha] dried up, very dry J.I,215 (of fields); Miln.302 (of the heart); PvA.64 (°sarīra). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisukkhita: {'def': '[pp. of pari+śukṣ. Intens. of śuṣ] dried up, withered Miln.303 (°hadaya). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisumbhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pari+śumbh] throwing down J.VI,508 (bhūmiyā p.). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisumbhati: {'def': '[pari+sumbhati] to strike, hit, throw down J.III,347 (=paharati C.); VI,370, 376 (id. C.). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parisussana: {'def': '【中】完全乾涸，凋萎。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pari+śuṣ] drying up completely, withering J.V,97. (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】完全干涸，凋萎。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parisussati: {'def': '[pari+sussati] to dry quite up, waste quite away J.II,5, 339, 437. -- Caus. parisoseti (q. v.). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari遍+sus(梵wus)弄乾+ya), 乾涸，浪费掉。【过】parisussi。【过分】parisukkha。【独】parisussitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pari + sus + ya), 干涸，浪费掉。【过】 ~sussi。【过分】~sukkha。【独】 ~sitvā。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parisā: {'def': '【阴】社团，集会，协会。parisāvacara,【形】手足情谊(在团体中活动的人)，议员。〔它的尾母音在【合】被弄短，例：parisapariyanta, pari-samajjha〕。aṭṭha parisā,八众 (eight assemblies)︰1.khattiya-parisā,刹帝利众(the assembly of Khattiyas)，2.brāhmaṇa-parisā,婆罗门众 (the assembly of Brahmins)，3.gahapati-parisā 居士众 (the assembly of householders)，4.samaṇa-parisā,沙门众(the assembly of ascetics)，cātummahārājika-parisā,5.四大(天)王众(the assembly of devas of the Realm of the Four Great Kings)，6.tāvatiṁsa-parisā,三十三天众(the assembly of the Thirty-Three Gods)，7.māra-parisā,魔众(the assembly of Māras)，8.brahma-parisā,梵众(the assembly of Brahmās)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】社团，集会，协会。 ~vacara, 【形】手足情谊（在团体中活动的人）。〔它的尾元音在【合】被弄短，例： parisapariyanta, pari-samajjha 〕。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic pariṣad; in R. V, also pariṣad as adj. surrounding, lit. “sitting round,” fr. pari+sad. -- In Pāli the cons. stem has passed into a vocalic ā-stem, with the only preservation of cons. Loc. sg. parisati Vin.IV,285; A.II,180 (ī); J.V,61; DA.I,141 and parisatiṁ M.I,68; A.II,180 (v. l.); J.V,332, besides the regular forms parisāyaṁ (Loc. sg.) Vin.II,296; A.V,70; and parisāsu (Loc. pl.) S.II,27; It.64] surrounding people, group, collection, company, assembly, association, multitude. Var. typical sets of assemblies are found in the Canon, viz, eight assemblies (khattiya°, brāhmaṇa°, gahapati°, samaṇa°, Cātummahārājika°, Tāvatiṁsa°, Māra°, Brahma°, or the assemblies of nobles, brahmins, householders, wanderers, of the angel hosts of the Guardian Kings, of the Great Thirty-Three, of the Māras, and of the Brahmās) D.II,109; III,260; M.I,72; A.IV,307. ‹-› four assemblies (the first four of the above) at D.III,236; Nd¹ 163; other four, representing the Buddha’s Order (bhikkhu°, bhikkhunī°, upāsaka°, upāsikā°, or the ass. of bhikkhus, nuns, laymen and female devotees; cp. same enumⁿ at Divy 299) S.II,218; A.V,10; cp. J.I,40 (catu-parisa-majjhe), 85 (id.), 148 (id.). -- two assemblies (viz. Brahma°, Māra°) at D.III,260; allegorically two groups of people (viz. sāratta-rattā & asāratta-rattā) M.II,160=A.I,70 sq. -- For var. uses of the word see the foll. passages: Vin.II,188, 296 (rājaparisā); III,12 (Bhagavā mahatiyā parisāya parivuto surrounded by a great multitude); IV,153 (Gen. parisāya); M.I,153 (nevāpika°); II,160; III,47; S.I,155 (brahma°), 162 sarājikā p.), 177; A.I,25 (mahā°), 70 (uttānā p.), 71 (ariya°), 242 (tisso p.); II,19 (°āya mando), 133, 183, 185 (deva°); III,253 (khattiya°); IV,80, 114; It.64 (upāsakā °sāsu virocare); Sn.349, 825 sq.; J.I,151, 264; VI,224 (omissaka°); Pv III,9⁶; Miln.187, 249, 359 (38 rāja-parisā, or divisions of the royal retinue); PvA.2, 6, 12, 21, 78 and passim; Sdhp.277. saparisa together with the assembly Vin.IV,71; adv. °ṁ ThA.69. -- Note. The form of parisā as first part of a cpd. is parisa° (=*parisad, which laṭter is restored in cpd. parisaggata=*parisad-gata). -- See also pārisagga.

--antare within the assembly J.III,61. --âvacara one who moves in the society, i. e. the Brotherhood of the Bhikkhus A.IV,314; V,10. --gata (ggata) having entered a company Sn.397 (=pūga-majjha-gata SnA 377); Pug.29. --ññū knowing the assembly A.III,148; IV,113 (+kālaññū puggalaññū), cp. D.III,252. --dussana defilement of the Assembly A.II,225 (opp. °sobhaṇā). --pariyanta the outer circle of the congregation DhA.I,67; III,172. --majjhe in the midst of the assembly J.I,267; II,352; PvA.11. --sārajja being afraid of the a. Miln.196=Nd² 470 (so read for parisārajja). (Page 437)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '众;会众(catasso parisā 四众)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Paritajjita: {'def': '[pari+tajjita] scared (exceedingly), frightened Sdhp.147. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paritapa: {'def': '【阳】paritapana(pari+tāpana, of tap),【中】苦恼，痛苦，苦修。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paritapeti: {'def': '(pari+tap(梵tap)热+e), 使烧焦，折磨，调戏。【过】paritapesi。【过分】paritapita。【独】paritapetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paritappati: {'def': '[Pass. of pari+tap] to be vexed, to grieve, worry, sorrow Th.2, 313 (=santappati ThA.233); Miln.313. -- pp. paritatta (q. v.). (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+tap(梵tap)热+ya),使悲伤，烦恼。【过】paritappi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paritasita: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+tasita¹ or tasita²] worry, excitement D.I,40 (v. l. °tassita, cp. Dial I.53). (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paritassanā: {'def': '(‹paritassati),【阴】恐惧，紧张，刺激，渴望(trembling, fear; nervousness, worry; excitement, longing(=ubbijjanā phandanā etc. DA. I,111))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. paritassati, q. v. for meaning] trembling, fear; nervousness, worry; excitement, longing D.I,17 (=ubbijjanā phandanā etc. DA.I,111); M.I,136; III,227; S.III,15 sq., 133; Miln.253, 400. -- neg. a° S.III,15; M.I,136. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paritassati: {'def': '(°tasati) [pari+tasati¹, in form clearly=Sk. paritṛṣyati, but freq. confused with tasati², cp. tasa. Sn.924 is the only example of paritasati representing tasati²] to be excited, to be tormented, to show a longing after, to be worried D.II,68; M.I,36, 67, 151; S.II,82, 194; III,43, 55; IV,23, 65, 168; A.II,27; III,133 sq.; Sn.621 (=taṇhāya na bhāyati SnA 467, thus combining tasati¹ & tasati²), 924 (Pot. parittase, interpreted by Nd¹ 373 as taseyya, uttaseyya, bhāyeyya, thus taken as tasati²); Miln.253, 400; Dh.397 (=taṇhāya na bhāyati DhA.IV,159); Sdhp.476. -- ppr. aparitassaṁ D.II,68; M.I,67; S.II,82; III,55; It.94. ‹-› pp. paritasita (q. v.). (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paritasati) (pari+tas+ya)(pari+tasati1,梵paritrsyati, but freq.confused with tasati2, Sn 924 is the only example of paritasati representing tasati2), 兴奋，焦虑，显示渴望(to be excited, to be tormented, to show a longing after, to be worried)。【过】paritassi。【过分】paritassita。【现分】aparitassaṁ。【过分】paritasita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paritassin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paritassati] trembling, excited, worrying, only neg. a° A.IV,108, 111, 230 sq. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paritatta: {'def': '[pp. of paritappati] tormented, worried, vexed, grieved Miln.313. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parito: {'def': '(adv.) [fr. pari, cp. Sk. paritaḥ] round about, around, on every side, everywhere, wholly Vin.II,194; SnA 393; VvA.316; PvA.33. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】周围，在每边，各处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paritoseti: {'def': '(pari+tus+e)使满足，使快乐。【过】paritosesi。【过分】paritosita。【独】paritosetva。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+toseti] to please, appease, satisfy, make happy J.I,262; III,386; V,216; PvA.213 (v. l. SS+ āsiñcati). (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paritta: {'def': '【中】1.少许(small; insignificant; little)。2.护卫，保护经(protection; protective charm)。parittasutta,【中】施法线(enchanted thread)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'parittaka,【形】小的，不重要的，一点点，些许的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [BSk. parītta, pari+pp. of dā in short form *tta, like ātta for ādatta. The development of meaning however causes difficulties, paridatta meaning given up, transmitted, cp. Divy 388, whereas P. paritta means trifling. The BSk. form parītta (e. g. Divy 204, 498, 504; AvŚ I.329; II,137) may be a re-translation of P. paritta, which may correspond to Sk, prarikta, pp. of pra+ric, meaning “that which is exceeded,” i. e. left (over or behind)] small, little, inferior, insignificant, limited, of no account, trifling Vin.I,270; D.I,45; M.III,148 (°ābha of limited splendour, opp. Appamāṇ’‹-› ābha); S.II,98; IV,160 (opp. adhimatta); A.IV,241; V,63; It.71; Sn.61, 390 (°pañña of inferior wisdom, cp. Nd² 415), 1097 (id.); J.I,221; Dhs.181, 584, 1018, 1034 (cp. Dhs.trsl. 265, 269); DA.I,119; KhA 133 (°dīpā the 2,000 inferior islands), 176 (500 do.); PvA.198; Sdhp.251, 261. Synonyms: appaka, omaka, lāmaka, dukkha Nd² 414; catukka Nd² 415 (opp. mahā); appaka PvA.48, 60; appama taka PvA.262; ittara PvA.60; oma SnA 347; oraka SnA 489; lāmaka SnA 347. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) & Parittā (f.) [fr. pari+trā, cp. tāṇa, tāyati & also parittāna] protection, safeguard; (protective) charm, palliative, amulet Vin.II,110 (atta° f. personal protection) IV.305 (gutt’atthāya °ṁ pariyāpuṇāti); A.II,73 (rakkhā+parittā); J.I,200 (manto+parittaṁ+ vaḍḍhiṁ), 396 (paccekabuddhehi °ṁ kārāpeti makes them find a safeguard through the P.); IV,31 (osadhaṁ vā °ṁ vā); Miln.150 (f. & nt.). -- Var. parittās in the way of Suttantas are mentioned at Vism.414 (Khandha°; Dhajagga°: S.I,218 sq.; Āṭānāṭiya°: D.III,195 sq.; Mora°: J.II,33). Cf. Dialogues III,185.

--vālikā sand worn on the head as an amulet J.I,396, 399. --suttaka a thread worn round the head as a charm J.I,396, 399. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paritta-subha: {'def': 'and Parittābha are 2 classes of heavenly beings of the fine-material sphere; s. deva (II).', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Parittaka: {'def': '[paritta¹+ka] small, insignificant, little Nd¹ 306 (for appaka etc. as at Nd² 414); Pv.I,10¹¹; II,9⁶⁷; Miln.121 (a°), 253; DA.I,170 (for appa); PvA.51; Sdhp.42. -- f. parittikā Th.1, 377. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parittasubha: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Parīttaśubha, paritta-subha] 少淨 [天].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. [BSk. Parīttaśubha, paritta-subha] 少浄 [天].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Parittābha: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Parīttābha, parittaābha] 少光 [天].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. [BSk. Parīttābha, parittaābha] 少光 [天].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'and Paritta-subha are 2 classes of heavenly beings of the fine-material sphere; s. deva (II).', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Parittāna: {'def': 'Parittāṇa,【中】保护，避难所，安全。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parittāsin: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+tāsin, fr. tāsa of tasati²] being in dread of (-°) S.I,201. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parittāyaka: {'def': '【形】保护的，保护。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pari+tāyati] safeguarding against, sheltering against, keeping away from Vism.376 (aṅgāra-vassaṁ p. thero). (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parittāṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+tāṇa. Cp. Epic Sk. paritrāṇa] protection, shelter, refuge, safeguard, safety D.I,9 (sara° from an arrow, i. e. a shield); III,189; J.VI,455; PvA.284; Sdhp.396.

--kitikā a protecting arrangement Vin.II,152, cp. Vin. Texts III,174. (Page 427)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parituleti: {'def': '(pari+tul+e)称(重量)，考虑。【过】paritulesi。【过分】paritulita。【独】parituletvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+tuleti] to weigh, consider, estimate, think Vism.522. -- VbhA.130. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paritāpa: {'def': '=foll. Miln.313 (ātāpa+). (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paritāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+tāpana, of tap] tormenting, torture, affliction, mortification M.I,78, 341--344; A.I,151, 296; II,205 sq. (atta° self-mortification, opp. para°); Pug.55, 56, 61; PvA.18 (atta°), 30 (id.). Often comb^d with ātāpana (q. v.). (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paritāpeti: {'def': '[pari+tapeti] to burn, scorch, molest, trouble, torture, torment M.I,341 (ātāpeti+), 506; S.IV,337; A.III,54, 380; J.V,420 (mā paritāpi). (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivaccha: {'def': '(nt.) [formation from ger. of pari+vrt, corresp. to *parivṛtyaṁ (?)] being active, preparation, outfit J.V,46; VI,21 (gamana°); DhA.I,207 (gloss & v. l. gamana-parisajja), 395 (v. l. parisajja).

Note. According to Kern, Toev. s. v. parivaccha is wrong spelling for parivacca which is abstr. from pariyatta (*pariyatya), with va for ya as in pavacchati, pavecchati=Sk. prayacchati. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】准备，用具。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parivadentikā: {'def': '(f.) [pari+vadento+ikā; vadento being ppr. Caus. of vad] making resound, resounding, in cpd. godhā° “string-resounding,” i. e. a string instrument, lute J.VI,580 (cp. Sk *parivāda an instrument with which the lute is played). -- Another parivadentikā we find at J.VI,540 (C. reading for T. °vadantikā, with v. l. °devantikā) denoting a kind of bird (ekā sakuṇajāti). (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivahati: {'def': '[pari+vahati] to carry about Th.2, 439 (dārake). (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivajjana: {'def': '【中】避免，避开。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pari+vṛj] avoiding, avoidance M. I.7, 10; A.III,387, 389; Miln.408; Vism.33. As f. °ā at Vism.132, and ibid. as abstr. parivajjanatā. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivajjeti: {'def': '(pari+vaj +e) 避开，避免，远离。【过】parivajjesi。【过分】parivajjita。【现分】parivajjenta。【独】parivajjetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+vajjeti, Caus. of vṛj] to shun, avoid, keep away from (Acc.) M.I,10; S.I,69, 102, 188, 224; Sn.57 (=vivajjeti Nd² 419), 395 sq., 768 (kāme, cp. Nd¹ 6), 771; It.71; Dh.123 (pāpāni), 269; J.IV,378 (fut. °essati); Pv IV.1⁴⁶ (nivesanaṁ); IV,1^7Q (loke adinnaṁ °ayassu); Miln.91 (grd. °ajjayitabba), 300, 408; PvA.150 (v. l. °ajjati), 221 (jīvitaṁ, for vijahati, better read with v. l. pariccajati). (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivasati: {'def': '[pari+vas²] to stay, dwell, to live under probation Vin.III,186 (grd. °vatthabba); IV,30, 127; D.I,176; M.I,391; S.II,21; Sn.697 (=pabbajitvā tāpasavesena vasati SnA 490). -- ppr. med. paribbasāna; pp. parivuṭṭha & parivuttha (q. v.). (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari + vas + a), 在缓刑。【过】 ~vasi。【过分】 parivuttha。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari遍+vas2住+a), 1.停留，住(to stay, dwell)。2.别住(parivāsa(波利婆沙)，罚令独宿，静思其过)，在缓刑(to live under probation)。【过】parivasi。【过分】parivuṭṭha & parivuttha。grd. parivasavatthabba; Sn.697 (=pabbajitvā tāpasavesena vasati SnA 490). -- ppr. med. paribbasāna.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parivassati: {'def': 'at Pv.II,9³⁶ is to be read as paridhassati (see paridahati). (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivatta: {'def': '(Parivattati 的【过分】), 已旋转，已滚动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pari+vṛt] changing round, twisting, turning; f. pl.°āyo J.V,431. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Parivattati 的【过分】), 已旋转，已滚动。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parivattaka: {'def': '【形】交换的，滚动的，旋转的，扭转的，滚动的人，翻译者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. parivatta] circle (lit. turning round) J.I,101; cp. parivattika in phrase paligha° (q. v.). (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】滚动的，旋转的，扭转的，滚动的人，翻译者。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parivattana: {'def': '【中】旋转，滚动，翻译。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. parivattati] setting going, keeping up, propounding J.I,200 (°manta adj. one who knows a charm); Nett 1 sq., 106. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】旋转，滚动，翻译。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parivattati: {'def': '(pari遍+vat+a), 旋转，滚动，见异思迁。【过】parivatti。【独】parivattitvā。【现分】parivattamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pari + vat + a), 旋转，滚动，见异思迁。【过】 ~vatti。【独】~ttitvā。【现分】 ~vattamāna。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pari+vṛt] 1. to turn round, twist (trs. & intrs.), go about Vin.II,220; J.V,431 (singaṁ); Pv IV.5³ (=pariyāti PvA.260); Miln.118; DA.I,265. -- 2. (intrs.) to change about, move, change, turn to Pv.II,10⁵ (=pariṇamati PvA.144); III,4⁴ (id. 194); III,6⁵; PvA.178. -- Caus. parivatteti (q. v.). Cp. vipari°. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivatteti: {'def': '(Parivattana的【使】), 旋转，滚动，背诵，交换，翻译。【过】parivattesi。【过分】parivatita。【独】parivattetvā, parivattiya。【现分】parivattenta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of parivattati] 1. to turn round (trs.), to turn over J.I,202; II,275 (sarīraṁ); V,217; DA.I,244. -- 2. to deal with, handle, set going, put forth, recite Vism.96, in phrase mantaṁ p. to recite, practise a charm J.I,200, 253; Pv.II,6¹³ (=sajjhāyati vāceti PvA.97); cp. mantaṁ pavatteti & pavattar; saraṁ p. to make a sound J.I,405; adhippāyaṁ speak out, propound, discuss PvA.131. -- 3. to change, exchange Vin.II,174; J.III,437. -- pp. parivattita (q. v.). (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivattita: {'def': '[pp. of parivatteti] 1. turned round, twisted J.IV,384. -- 2. recited Vism.96. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivaḍḍhati: {'def': '[pari+vṛdh] to increase, to be happy or prosperous Miln.297 (cittaṁ p.; opp. pariyādiyati). (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivaṇṇeti: {'def': '[pari+vaṇṇeti] to describe, praise, extol J.VI,213 (ppr. °vaṇṇayanto). -- pp. °vaṇṇita. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivaṇṇita: {'def': '[pp. of parivaṇṇeti] extolled, praised Sdhp.557. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivaṭuma: {'def': '(?) (adj.) [doubtful spelling & explⁿ; perhaps “parivaṭṭin?] forming a circle, circular D.I,22 (trsl^d “a path could be traced round it” Dial. I.36). Can it be misspelling for pariyanta? Kern, Toev. s. v. equals it to Sk. parivartman, and adds reference °kata “bounded” (syn. paricchinna) Miln.132. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivaṭṭa: {'def': '【中】圆周。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】圆周。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pari+vṛt, cp. parivattana] round, circle, succession, mainly in two phrases, viz. catu° fourfold circle M.III,67; S.III,59 (pañcupādāna-kkhandhe, cp. aṭṭha-parivaṭṭa-adhideva-ñāṇadassana A.IV,304); and ñāti° circle of relatives D.I,61 (=ñāti DA.I,170; cp. explⁿ ābandhan’atthena ñāti yeva ñāti -- parivaṭṭo DA.I,181=PugA 236); II,241; M.III,33; Pug.57; ThA.68; VvA.87. -- See further at DA.I,143 (rāja°), 283 (id., but spelt °vatta); SnA 210. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivesaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pari+viṣ] waiting, serving up meals Vism.109. -- f. °ikā ThA.17. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+vis),【形】侍候饮食的人(waiting, serving up meals)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】侍候饮食的人。 ~sanā, 【阴】饲养，侍候饮食。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parivesanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pari+vis] distribution of food, feeding, serving meals Vin.I,229; S.I,172; Sn.p. 13 (=bhattavissagga SnA 140); Miln.247, 249; DhA.IV,162; PvA.109 (°ṭṭhāna), 135 (id.). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+vis),【阴】分配食物、饲养、侍候饮食(distribution of food, feeding, serving meals)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariveṇa: {'def': '【中】被隔开的僧居所。(目前它意谓为：宗教教所)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】被隔开的僧居所。（目前它意谓为：宗教教所）。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [etym.?] 1. all that belongs to a castle, a mansion and its constituents Vv 84⁵³ (expl^d at VvA.351 as follows: veṇiyato pekkhitabbato pariveṇaṁ pāsāda-kūtâgāra-ratti-ṭṭhān’ādisampannaṁ pākāraparikkhittaṁ dvārakoṭṭhaka-yuttaṁ āvāsaṁ); DhA.I,260 (pāsāda°). -- 2. a cell or private chamber for a bhikkhu (cp. Vin. Texts III,109, 203) Vin.I,49=II.210 (p. koṭṭhaka upaṭṭhāna-sālā); I,216 (vihārena vihāraṁ pariveṇena pariveṇaṁ upasaṅkamitvā), 247 (id.); II,167 (vihāra+); III,69, 119 (susammaṭṭhaṁ); IV,52, 252 (°vāsika); J.I,126; Miln.15 (°ṁ sammajjati), 19; Vism.90; DhA.II,179 (°dvāra); IV,204; VbhA.13. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariveṇi: {'def': '(f.)=pariveṇa 2; Vin.I,80 (anu pariveṇiyaṁ each in their own cell), 106 (id.). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariveṭhita: {'def': '[pp. of pari+veṣṭ] enveloped, covered Miln.22. Opp. nibbeṭṭhita (q. v.). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivisaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. parisati] providing, serving food Vism.108. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivisati: {'def': '(pari遍+vis+a), 以食物招待，在他人用餐时侍立一旁。【过】parivisi。【独】parivisitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+viṣ, viveṣti; same use of parivise (inf.) in R. V, X.61¹⁰] to serve (with food=Instr.), wait upon, present, offer Vin.I,240 (bhatṭena); II,77 (kaṇājakena bilaṅgadutiyena); D.II,127; J.I,87, 90; II,277; IV,116; Pv.II,8⁴ (=bhojeti PvA.107); II,8⁸ (id. 109); Vism.108, 150 (sūdo bhattāraṁ p.); VvA.6; PvA.42, 78. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari + vis + a), 以食物招待，在他人用餐时侍立一旁。【过】~visi。【独】 ~visitvā。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parivitakka: {'def': '【阳】反映，考虑。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari遍+vi+tak思索),【阳】反映，考虑周详。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+vitakka, cp. BSk. parivitarka Divy 291] reflection, meditation, thought, consideration M.II,170 (ākāra°), Vin.II,74; S.II,115 (id.); A.II,193 (id.); Miln.13; DhA.II,62; DhsA.74; VvA.3; PvA.282 (vutta-°e nipāta in explⁿ of nūna). Usually in phrase cetasā ceto-parivitakka mental reflection, e. g. D.I,117; II,218; S.I,121, 178; III,96; V,294; A.III,374; and cetasoparivitakka, e. g. D.I,134; S.I,71, 103, 139; II,273; III,96, 103; IV,105; V,167; A.II,20. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivitakketi: {'def': '[pari+vitakketi] to consider, reflect, meditate upon J.III,277. -- pp. °vitakkita (q. v.). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari + vi + tak + e), 反映，考虑。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~kkita。【独】 ~ketvā。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari遍+vi+tak思索+e), 反映，考虑周详。【过】parivitakkesi。【过分】parivitakkita。【独】parivitakketvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parivitakkita: {'def': '[pp. of parivitakketi] reflected, meditated, thought over M.I,32; S.I,193. -- nt. °ṁ reflection, thinking over PvA.123 (°e with ref. to nūna, i. e. particle of reflection). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivitthiṇṇa: {'def': '[pari+vitthiṇṇa, Sk. vīstīrṇa, pp., of vi+ stṛ] spread out wide Miln.99. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivuta: {'def': '(parivāreti 的【过分】) 已包围，已跟随。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(parivāreti 的【过分】)。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of pari+vṛ] surrounded by (-° or Instr.) S.I,177; J.I,152 (miga-gaṇa°), 203 (devagaṇena); II,127 (dāsi-gaṇa°); III,371 (mahā-jana°); VI,75; Vv 16⁵ (=samantato p. VvA.81); PvA.3 (dhutta-jana°), 62 (parijana°), 140 (deva-gaṇa°). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivuṭṭha: {'def': '& °vuttha [pp. of parivasati] staying (a period), living (for a time), spending (or having spent) one’s probation (cp. BSk. paryuṣita-parivāsa AvŚ I.259) Vin.III,186 (tth); S.II,21 (ṭṭh). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivyatta: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+vyatta] quite conspicuous or clear Vism.162. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivyaya: {'def': '﹐【梵语】辛，西藏语 spod(药味之义)。指五种有辛味之蔬菜，五辛，又作五荤。五辛：(一) 蒜(大蒜、蒜头、葫菱、家蒜，巴lasuṇa；梵 lawuna)、葱(慈葱、胡葱、春葱，梵 latārka)、路荞(荞菜、小根菜、小蒜、野韭、宅蒜、菜芝、山择蒜、薤白头、薤子、野蒜、介白、小独蒜，梵 palāṇḍu)、革葱(茖葱、山葱、革山葱、薤，梵grñjana)、兴渠(阿魏、胡荽，梵hiṅgu)等五种。Vin.Cv.II,141.；CS:p.282： “ābādhappaccayā lasuṇaṁ khāditun”ti.(病缘，许食蒜。)(巴利律没有提到不准吃其他四辛)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parivādinī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pari+vad, late Sk. the same] a lute of seven strings Abhp. 138. -- See parivadentikā. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivāra: {'def': '【阳】随行人员，随员，壮丽，从者。 ~ka, 【形】陪伴。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari+ var(梵vr)),【阳】随行人员，随员，壮丽，从者。parivāraka,【形】陪伴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm. 附隨 [律藏的第三部, 附録].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. 附髄 [律蔵の第三部, 附録].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '[fr. pari+vṛ] 1. surrounding, suite, retinue, followers, entourage, pomp J.I,151; IV,38; VI,75; PvA.21, 30 (°cāga-cetana, read pariccāga-cetana?); usually as adj. --° surrounded by, in company of Vin.I,38 (dasasata°); A.II,91 (deva° & asura°); J.I,92 (mahā-bhikkhusaṅgha°); Pug.52 (pheggu sāra°; with explⁿ PugA 229: rukkho sayaṁ-pheggu hoti, parivāra-rukkhā pan’assa sārā honti); Miln.285 (dvisahassa-paritta-dīpa-p° ā, cattāro mahā dīpā); Vism.37; DhA.III,262 (pañcasatabhikkhu°); PvA.53 (accharā-sahassa°), 74 (dvisahassadīpa°); sa° with a retinue (of . . .) J.I,49 (cattāro dīpe); PvA.20. -- 2. followers, accompaniment or possession as a sign of honour, and therefore meaning “respect,” attendance, homage, fame (cp. paricāra) A.I,38 °sampadā) Ps.I,172 (pariggaha, p., paripūra); DhA.II,77; ThA.241 (dhana+, riches and fame); VbhA.466; PvA.137 (sampatti=yaso); VvA.122 (=yaso). -- 3. ingredient, accessories (pl.), requisite J.I,266 (pañca-sugandhika°); Miln.290 (sa° dāna); DA.I,297 (=parikkhārā). -- 4. as N. it is the name of the last book of the Vinaya Piṭaka (“The Accessory”), the Appendix,a sort of résumé and index of the preceding books SnA 97 (sa-parivāraka Vinaya-piṭaka); VbhA.432. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivāraka: {'def': '(adj.) [parivāra+ka] accompanying, forming a retinue J.V,234. See also parivāra 4 and paricāraka. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivāraṇa: {'def': '【中】包围。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pari+vṛ] 1. covering, drapery (so trsl. at K.S. p. 45) S.I,33. -- 2. (adj.) (-°) surrounded by J.V,195 (=parikkhitta C.). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】包围。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parivāreti: {'def': '(pari遍+var+e), 包围，跟随。【过】parivāresi。【过分】parivārita。【独】parivāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pari + var + e), 包围，跟随。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~vārita。【独】~retvā。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pari+vṛ] to cover, encompass, surround J.I,181 (nagaraṁ °ayiṁsu); II,102 (fut. °essati); III,371 (rukkhaṁ); IV,405 (for parikaroti); VI,179. ‹-› ger. parivāretvā used as prep. “round” J.I,172 (pokkharaṇiṁ). -- In meaning “to serve, attend upon,” also “to attend upon oneself, to amuse oneself,” parivāreti is often erroneously read for paricāreti, e. g. at D.II,13; Pv IV.1²⁹ (v. l. °cāreti); PvA.228; in ppr. med. °vāriyamāna (with v. l. °cāriyamāna) at D.II,21; A.I,145; J.I,58; VvA.92. -- See also anuparivāreti. -- pp. parivārita (q. v.). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivārita: {'def': '[pp. of parivāreti] surrounded, fig. honoured S.I,166, 192=Th1,1235; J.II,48; purakkhata+); DhA.IV,49 (=purakkhata Dh.343); DhsA.1 (devānaṁ gaṇena); Dāvs.I,16 (v. l. for parimārita). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivāsa: {'def': '[fr. pari+vas², cp. Epic Sk. parivāsa only in meaning 1] 1. sojourn; stay, in phrase vipassanā° DhA.III,118; DhsA.215. -- 2. period under probation, (living under) probation Vin.III,186 (°ṁ vasati, cp. parivuttha); IV,30; S.II,21 (°ṁ vasati). °ṁ deti to allow probation Vin.I,49; II,7; IV,30, 127; °ṁ yācati to ask for probation Vin.IV,30, 127. -- samodhāna° inclusive probation Vin.II,48 sq.; suddhanta° probation of complete purification Vin.II,59 sq. -- 3. period, time (lit. stay), interval, duration Ud.7 (eka-ratti°).

--dāna the allowance of probation A.I,99. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivāsika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pari+vas², see parivasati] 1. “staying,” i. e. usual, accustomed, common SnA 35 (°bhatta; or is it “fermented,” and thus to be taken to No. 3?); a° unusual, new, uncommon J.II,435 (where it is comb^d with abhinava, which should be substituted for readings accuṇha, abbhuṇha & abhiṇha according to similar explⁿ of paccaggha at PvA.87), with v. l. samparivāsita (well-seasoned?). -- 2. a probationer Vin.II,162. In this meaning usually spelt pāri° (q. v.). -- 3. in combⁿ cira° (with ref. to food) it may be interpreted either as “staying long, being in use for a long time,” i. e. stale; or it may be derived fr. vāsa³ (odour, perfume or seasoning) and translated (so Mrs. Rh. D. in Expositor 63, 64) “long-fermented” (better “seasoned”?) DhsA.48 (°vāsika & vāsiya); ThA.29. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivāsita: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+pp. of vāseti fr. vāsa³] perfumed (all round) J.I,51 (v. l. °vārita); cp. samparivāsita (wellseasoned?), which is perhaps to be read at J.II,435 for aparivāsika. (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(parivāseti 的【过分】), 已发香味，已发出气味。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(parivāseti 的【过分】), 已发香味，已发出气味。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parivāta: {'def': '(-°) [pp. of pari+vā] blown round or through, i. e. filled with, stirred by Miln.19 (isi-vāta°). (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parivīmaŋsati: {'def': '(pari + vi + ma + ŋ-a), 考虑，彻底地考虑。【过】 ~ŋsi。(p214)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parivīmaṁsati: {'def': '[pari+vīmaṁsati, Desid. of pari+man, cp. vīmaṁsā for mīmāṁsā] to think over, consider thoroughly, examine, search S.II,80 sq.; It.42=Sn.975 (ppr. dhammaṁ °vīmaṁsamāna, cp. Nd¹ 508); DA.I,134; DhA.IV,117 (attānaṁ). (Page 436)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari遍+vi+ma+ṁ-a), 考虑，彻底地考虑，遍观。【过】parivīmaṁsi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariya: {'def': '[either short form of pariyāya, or ger. of pari+ī substantivised (for the regular form paricca) representing an ending --ya instead of --tya. -- Bdhgh at Vism.409 takes pariya as nt., but seems to mix it with the idea of a ppr. by defining it as “pariyātī ti pariyaṁ, paricchindatī ti attho”] encompassing, fathoming, comprehending (as ger.); penetration, understanding (as n.). Only in phrase ceto-pariya-ñāṇa knowledge encompassing heart or mind (cp. phrase cetasā ceto paricca) D.II,82 sq. (v. l. °āya); III,100 (v. l. °āye); DA.I,223 (corresp. with pubbe-nivāsa-ñāṇa); with which alternates the phrase indriya-paro-pariya-ñāṇa in same meaning (see indriya cpds. & remark on paropariya) J.I,78. -- See also pariyatta¹ pariyatti, pariyāya 3, and cpds. of ceto. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyanta: {'def': '【阳】末端，界限，高潮。pariyantavatiṁ(pariyanta节度+vatiṁ围墙),【阴】有节度。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+anta, cp. Sk. paryanta] 1. limit, end, climax, border S.I,80 (manāpa° “limit-point in enjoyment”; cp. C. nipphattikaṁ koṭikaṁ K.S. 320); J.I,149 (hattha-pāda° hoofs), 221 (udaka°), 223 (sara°); II,200 (aṅgana°); Pv.II,13¹²; DhA.III,172 (parisa°). ‹-› 2. limit, boundary, restriction, limitation Vin.II,59, 60 (āpatti°); Nd¹ 483 (distinguishes between 4 pariyantā with ref. to one’s character, viz. sīlasaṁvara° indriyasaṁvara°, bhojane mattaññutā°, jāgariyânuyoga°). ‹-› 3. (adj.-°) bounded by, limited by, surrounded, ending in Vin.IV,31; M.III,90; S.II,122 (āyu°); A.I,164 (id.); Sn.577 (bhedana°); Pv.I,10¹³ (parikkhitta PvA.52). --apariyanta (adj.) boundless, limitless PvA.58, 166.

--kata restricted, limited, bounded Nd² taṇhā^III (with sīmakata & odhikata; v. l. pariyanti°, cp. BSk. paryantīkṛta “finished” Divy 97, 236). --cārin living in selfrestriction Sn.964 (cp. Nd¹ 483). --dassāvin seeing the limit A.V,50. --rahita without limits DhA.III,252. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyantavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pariyanta] having a limit, having a set or well-defined purpose; f. °vatī (vācā) discriminating speech D.I,4=M.III,49=Pug.58; expl^d as “paricchedaṁ dassetvā yatha ‘ssa paricchedo paññāyati, evaṁ bhāsatī ti attho” DA.I,76=PugA 238. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyantika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. pariyanta] ending in, bounded or limited by S.II,83=A.II,198 (kāya-p. °ā & jīvita-p. °ā vedanā); Vism.69 (bhojana°, udaka°, āsana°); Sdhp.440 (kāla° sīla). (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中)终止在，由…所限制的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyatta: {'def': '² (adj.) [cp. Sk. paryāpta. pp. of pari+āp, see pāpuṇāti] (a) capable of, mastered, kept in mind, learned by heart; only in phrase dhammo ca vinayo ca p. Vin.II,285=KhA 92; D.III,241 sq. (yathā sutaṁ yathā p°ṁ dhammaṁ). -- (b) sufficient, enough PvA.33 (=alaṁ) (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [abstr. fr. pariya (pari+i) but confused with pariyatta² & pariyatti fr. pari+āp] learning, understanding, comprehension, only in phrase indriyaparo pariyatta (-ñāṇa) (knowledge of) what goes on in the intentions of others A.V,34, 38; Ps.I,121 sq.; Vbh.340. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyatti: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pari+āp, cp. Epic Sk. paryāpti & P. pariyāpuṇāti] adequacy, accomplishment, sufficiency, capability, competency; indriya-paro° efficiency in the (knowledge of) thoughts of others S.V,205; Nett 101. Three accomplishments are distinguished at DA.I,21 sq., viz. alagadd-ûpamā (like a serpent), nissaraṇatthā (on account of salvation) and bhaṇḍâgārika° (of a treasurer), apariyatti-kara bringing no advantage DhA.I,71. -- 2. accomplishment in the Scriptures, study (learning by heart) of the holy texts Vism.95. Also the Scriptures themselves as a body which is handed down through oral tradition. In this meaning the word is only found in later, dogmatic literature; --tīsu piṭakesu tividho pariyatti-bhedo DA.I,21. At SnA 494 it is classed with paccaya dhutaṅga & adhigama; as a part of paṭibhāna at Nd¹ 234=Nd² 386. pariyattiṁ uggaṇhāti to undertake the learning (of the Scriptures) DhA.II,30; cp. KhA 91 (tipiṭaka-sabba-p.-pabheda-dhara); J.II,48 (°ṁ ṭhapetvā leaving the learning aside); Miln.115, 215, 345, 411 (āgama°). -- Abl. pariyattito through learning by heart SnA 195 (opp. to atthato according to the meaning).

--dhamma that which belongs to the holy study, part or contents of the Scriptures, the Tipiṭaka comprising the nine divisions (see navaṅga Buddha-sāsana) KhA 191, 193; SnA 328; PvA.2; cp. °sāsana. --dhara knowing the Scriptures by heart Miln.21. --dhura (=ganthadhura): see vāsadhura. --paṭibhānavant possessed of intelligence as regards learning the Scriptures SnA 111. --parimāṇa extent of study SnA 1, 608. --bahula clever in the study of the Dhamma A.III,86. --bahussuta versed in the Scriptures SnA 110. --sāsana object, instruction of the Scriptures, code of the holy Texts (cp. °dhamma) Nd¹ 143; DhA.IV,39. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】圣典(the Scriptures)。pariyattidhara,【形】精通圣经的。knowing Scripture by heart.pariyattidhamma,【阳】pariyattisāsana,【中】圣典(code of the Holy Texts)。《众经撰杂譬喻》(14) (T4.534.3)︰「若有凡人解深经一句，口诵心念，身中三毒四魔八万垢门，皆不能自安，何况博采众法，为世桥梁者也。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyaya: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. paryaya, pari+i; the usual P. form is pariyāya, but at the foll. passages the short a is required metri causa] revolution, lapse of time, period, term J.III,460 (=kālapariyāya C.); V,367 (kāla°). (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyayadassavin: {'def': '看见法门者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyañña: {'def': '[pari+yañña] supreme or extraordinary offering or sacrifice SnA 321, 322. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyena: {'def': '[fr. pari+i, cp. Sk. *paryayana] going round, walking round; of a ship: sailing round, tour, voyage S.V,51 (pariyenāya, v. l. pariyādāya)=A.IV,127 (reads pariyādāya v. l. pariyāya). Reading is doubtful. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyesanā: {'def': '(f.) & Pariyesana (nt.) [fr. pariyesati] search, quest, inquiry (a) (°nā) D.II,58, 61, 280 (twofold, viz. sevitabbā and asevitabbā); III,289; M.I,161 (twofold, viz. ariyā & anariyā); A.II,247 (id.); S.I,143; II,144, 171; III,29; IV,8 sq. (assāda° & ādīnava°); A.I,68 (kāma°), 93. -- (b) (°na) Nd¹ 262 (°chanda,+paṭilābha° & paribhoga°); DhA.III,256 (kāmaguṇe °ussukka). With paṭiggahaṇa & paribhoga at DhA.I,75. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】搜寻，探索。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyesati: {'def': '[pari+esati, cp. BSk. paryeṣate to investigate AvŚ I.339. The P. word shows confusion between esati & icchati, as shown by double forms °iṭṭhuṁ etc. See also anvesati] to seek for, look, search, desire D.I,223 (°esamāna ppr.); Sn.482 (id.); S.I,177, 181; IV,62; A.II,23, 25, 247; Nd¹ 262; Nd² 427 (+paṭilabhati and paribhuñjati); J.I,3, 138; Miln.109, 313; DhA.III,263 (ppr. °esanto); PvA.31; Sdhp.506. -- grd. °esitabba S.II,130; inf. °esituṁ SnA 316; and °eṭṭhuṁ (conj. °iṭṭhuṁ?) Sn.289 (cp. SnA 316 which gives reading °eṭṭhuṁ as gloss); ger. °esitvā SnA 317, 414; -- pp. pariyesita & pariyiṭṭha (q. v.). Cp. for similar formation & meaning ajjhesati with pp. ajjhesita & ajjhiṭṭha. -- Cp. vi°. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+es+a) ,寻找，搜寻，调查，寻求(sim5 kiu5)。【过】pariyesi。【过分】pariyesita。【现分】pariyesanta, pariyesamāna。【独】pariyesitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyesita: {'def': '[pp. of pariyesati] searched, sought for, desired It.121. See also pariyiṭṭha. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyeti: {'def': '[pari+i] to go about, to go round, encircle, encompass; ger. paricca (q. v.). The pp. is represented by pareta, see also pareti which seems to stand for pariyeti. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyeṭṭhi: {'def': '【阴】寻找(search for)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+eṭṭhi of esati, ā+iṣ] search for D.I,222; A.I,93 (āmisa° & dhamma°); III,416; Sn.289 (vijjācaraṇa°) J.I,14; Nett 1, 5; DA.I,271. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyiṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of pariyesati] sought, desired, looked for S.IV,62 (a°); Miln.134; Vism.344 (°āhāra). (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyiṭṭhi: {'def': '=pariyeṭṭhi Sn.289 (SnA 316 reads pariyeṭṭhi). Perhaps we should read pariyeṭṭhuṁ (see pariyesati). (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyodapana: {'def': '(nt.) & Pariyodapanā(f.) [fr. pariyodapeti], cleansing, purification A.I,207 (cittassa); Dh.183 (=vodāpana DhA.III,237); Nett 44. In BSk. distorted to paryādapana MVastu III,12 (=Dh.183). (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyodapanā: {'def': '【阴】洗净，清净。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyodapeti: {'def': '[pari+odapeti, of Caus. of dā⁴ to clean] to cleanse, purify M.I,25; Dh.88 (=vodapeti parisodheti) DhA.II,162; Nett 44; ThA.237 (indriyāni). -- pp. pariyodāta & pariyodapita (q. v.). (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(=pariyodāpayati) (pari+ava+dā+āpe) 使清洁，净化。【过】pariyodapesi。【过分】pariyodapita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyodapita: {'def': '[pp. of pariyodapeti] cleansed, purified Nett 44 (cittaṁ). (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyodha: {'def': '[pari+yodha] defence A.I,154. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyodāpaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pariyodapeti] cleansing, purifying Vism.149 (ñāṇa). (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyodāta: {'def': '【形】非常乾净的，纯粹的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pari+odāta, cp. pariyodapeti] 1. very clean, pure, cleansed, mostly comb^d with parisuddha (+) D.I,75, 76 (+); M.I,26; S.I,198; III,235 (+); V,301; A.III,27 (+); IV,120 sq.; J.V,369 (+; see pariyāpadāna); Pug.60; DA.I,219; DhA.IV,72 (+); VvA.138. -- 2. very clever, accomplished, excellent [cp. BSk. paryavadāta in same meaning at Divy 100] J.III,281 (°sippa); Vism.136 (id.). (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyoga: {'def': '[fr. pari+yuj] cauldron (see Kern, Toev. s. v.) Miln.118. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】沙锅，面盆，汤盆，咖哩锅。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyogāha: {'def': '[pari+ogāha] diving into, penetration; only in cpd. dup° hard to penetrate, unfathomable S.IV,376; Miln.70. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyogāhana: {'def': '【中】投入，清净。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) & Pariyogāhanā (f.) [pari+ogāhana] plunging into, penetration Ps.I,106, 112; II,183; Dhs.390 (a°), 425 (a°); Pug.21 (a°); DhsA.260. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyogāhati: {'def': '(pari+av+gāh冲进+a) 跳入，看穿，穿透，细察。【过】pariyogāhi。【独】pariyogahitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Pariyogāheti [pari+ogāhati] to penetrate, fathom, scrutinise A.II,84; IV,13, 145 sq. (paññāya); J.I,341; Pug.33 (a°), 48 sq. Cp. ajjhogāhati. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyogāya: {'def': 'at M.I,480 is contracted form (ger.) of pariyogāhitvā (so expl^d by C.). (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyogāḷha: {'def': '[pp. of pariyogāhati, see also ogādha¹] dived into, penetrated into, immersed in (Loc.) Vin.I,181; D.I,110; M.I,380; S.II,58; IV,328; Vbh.329; Miln.283.

--dhamma one who has penetrated into the Dhamma Vin.I,16; A.IV,186, 210; Ud.49. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pariyogahati的【过分】) 已跳入，已看穿。parigaḷhana﹐【中】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyonaddha: {'def': '[pp. of pariyonandhati, cp. onaddha & BSk. paryavanaddha “overgrown” Divy, 120, 125] covered over, enveloped D.I,246; III,223 (a°); M.I,25; S.V,263; A.II,211 (uddhasta+); IV,86; J.I,30; Miln.161; SnA 596 (=nivuta); DhA.III,199; PvA.172 (taca°). (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'pariyonandhati的【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyonahana: {'def': '【中】pariyonāha【阳】覆盖，包封。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyonandhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. above] covering DA.I,135; DhA.III,198. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyonandhati: {'def': '(pari+av+nah+ṁ-a)限制(某人的)自由，束缚(某人)，包封，掩盖。【过】pariyonandhi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+avanandhati] to tie down, put over, envelop, cover up Vin.II,137; S.V,122; J.III,398; DhA.III,153. -- pp. pariyonaddha (q. v.). (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyonāha: {'def': '[pari+onāha] enveloping, covering D.I,246 (=nīvaraṇa); Dhs.1157 (cp. Dhs.trsl. 311); Miln.300. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyosita: {'def': '( pariyosapeti的【过分】)，已完成，已总结，已满足。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1. [pp. of pari+ava+sā] finished, concluded, satisfied, D.II,224; M.I,12 (paripuṇṇa+). -- 2. [pp. of pari+ava+śri, cp. ajjhosita] fixed on, bent on Miln.140 (°saṅkappa). (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyosāna: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+osāna of ava+sā] 1. end, finish, conclusion J.I,106 (sacca°=desanā°); PvA.9 (desanā° and passim), 136 (āyūha°), 162 (id.), 281 (=anta). Often contracted with ādi beginning & majjha middle (see e. g. SnA 327), esp. in phrase ādi-kalyāṇa majjhe kalyāṇa °kalyāṇa with reference to the Dhamma (expl^d as “ekagāthā pi hi samanta-bhaddakattā dhammassa paṭhamapadena ādik° dutiyatatiya-padehi majjhe k° pacchima-padena pariyosānak°” etc. at SnA 444), e. g. D.I,62; It.111 & passim. -- 2. end, i. e. perfection, ideal, Arahantship (see on these fig. meanings and its applⁿ to Nibbāna DA.I,175, 176) D.I,203 (brahmacariya +); II,283 (cp. Dial. II.316); III,55 (brahmacariya+); S.V,230; A.III,363 (nibbāna°), 376 (brahmacariya°); Vism.5. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】尽头，结论，完美，结束，究竟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyosāpeti: {'def': '(pari+ava+sa+āpe) 结束，完成，总结。【过】pariyosapesi。(【过分】pariyosapita。【独】pariyosapetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pari+ava+sā, Sk. syati, of which pp. pariyosita cp. osāpeti] 1. to make fulfil Vin.III,155; DA.I,241; ThA.159 (for khepeti Th.2, 168).- 2. to bring to an end, to finish Vism.244. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyottharati: {'def': '[pari+ottharati] to spread all over (intrs.) Miln.197. (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyudāharati: {'def': '[pari+udāharati] to utter solemnly, to proclaim aloud DhsA.1 (aor. °āhāsi). (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyukkhaṇṭhati: {'def': '[pari+ukkaṇṭhati] to have great longing, to be distressed J.V,417, 421 (mā °kaṇṭhi). (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyuṭthāna: {'def': '(pari+uṭṭhāna﹐梵paryuṭṭhāna),【中】缠(现行烦恼，相对於「随眠」(潜在的烦恼))，爆发(outburst)，偏爱，先入为主观念。偏见(prepossession)。【过分】pariyuṭṭhita。thīnamiddhapariyuṭṭhita﹐睡眠缠。十缠：一无惭、二无愧、三嫉、四悭、五悔、六睡眠、七掉举、八昏沉、九瞋忿、十覆也。见智度论七，俱舍论二十一。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyuṭṭhati: {'def': '[pari+uṭṭhāti] to arise, pervade; intrs. to become prepossessed, to be pervaded DhsA.366 (cittaṁ p.; corā magge pariyuṭṭhiṁsu). -- pp. pariyuṭṭhita (q. v.). (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyuṭṭhita: {'def': '[pari+uṭṭhita, with v. l. at D.II,104 parivuṭṭhita and BSk. rendering paryavasthita: see remarks on pariyuṭṭhāna and Dial. II.111] possessed by (the C. explⁿ as given K.S. 320 is “abhibhūta”), biassed, taken up by, full of (-°) M.I,18; III,14; S.IV,240 (maccheramala° ceto); A.I,281; II,58; It.43 (diṭṭhigatehi); Kvu I.91 (kāma-rāga°); ThA.78; Sdhp.581.

--citta whose heart is possessed by (-°) D.II,104 (Mārena); PvA.142 (maccheramala°), 195 (id.), 279 (kilesasamudācārena). --ṭṭhāyin being rooted in prepossession, affected by bias, S.III,3 sq. (so read for pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyin? ). (Page 434)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyuṭṭhāna: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+uṭṭhāna, it is doubtful whether this connection is correct, in this case the meaning would be “over-exertion.” BSk. paryavasthāna points to another connection, see Divy 185] state of being possessed (or hindered) by (-°), prepossession, bias, outburst M.I,18, Kvu XIV.6 (thīnamiddha°), 136; A.I,66 (°ajjhosāna); V,198 (adhiṭṭhāna-°samuṭṭhāna); Nd² under taṇhā^II (=Dhs.1059, where trslⁿ is “pervading,” based on explⁿ at DhsA.366: uppajjamānā [scil. taṇhā] cittaṁ pariyuṭṭhāti, and allegorical interpretation ibid.: the heart becomes possessed by lust as a road by highwaymen); Pug.21 (avijjā°); Vbh.383 (where 7 pariyuṭṭhānā [sic! pl. m.] are enum^d in the same set as under headings of anusaya & saṁyojana, thus placing p. into the same category as these two); Dhs.390, 1061 (avijjā°), 1162 (id.); Nett 13, 14, 18, 37, 79 sq.; DhsA.238; ThA.80; Vism.5 (with vītikkama & anusaya). Cp. also adhiṭṭhāna. (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyuṭṭhāti: {'def': '(pari+u+ṭhā+a) 出现，弥漫。【过】pariyuṭṭhāsi。【过分】pariyuṭṭhita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pari+yā] winding round, turning round; of a tree, branch J.VI,528 (duma°; read °pariyāsu with v. l. instead of T. pariyāyesu; C. expl^s by sākhā). (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyādinna: {'def': '[often spelt °diṇṇa, e. g. in vv. ll. at D.II,8; M.II,172; III,118. -- pp. of pariyādiyati] 1. (Pass.) exhausted, finished, put an end to, consummated Vin.I,25 (tejo); D.II,8=M.III,118; S.II,133 sq. (dukkhaṁ; parikkhīṇaṁ+); V,461 sq. -- neg. apariyādinna not finished, not exhausted M.I,79 (muttakarīsaṁ °ādiṇṇaṁ), 83 (dhammadesanā ādiṇṇā); S.II,178 sq. -- 2. (Med.) having exhausted, lost control over, being overcome (usually °citta adj.) Vin.II,185; M.II,172; S.II,228; Nd² 32; PvA.279. (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyādinnatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. pariyādinna] exhaustion, consummation DA.I,128. (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyādiyati: {'def': '[sometimes spelt °diyyati, e. g. Nd² s. v.; pari+ādiyati, q. v. for etym. ref.] 1. to put an end to, exhaust, overpower, destroy, master, control S.III,155 (rāgaṁ); Nd² under parisahati. -- Pot. °ādiyeyyaṁ Vin.I,25 (tejaṁ). -- ger. °ādiyitvā Vin.I,25 (tejaṁ); IV,109 (id.); S.I,84 (trsl. “confiscate”). -- 2. to become exhausted, give out J.V,186 (udakaṁ); Miln.297 (cittaṁ p.; opp. to parivaḍḍhati). -- pp. pariyādinna (q. v.). (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐pariyādiyyati(pari遍+ādiyati拿, pariyādāti的【被】)﹐遍拿(直译)，控制(overpower)，变成耗尽(to become exhausted)。【过】pariyadiyi。【过分】pariyādinna。【独】pariyādiyitvā。pot. pariyādiyeyyaṁ。ger. °adiyitvā。【反】parivaḍḍhati﹐遍增长。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyādāna: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+ādāna, opp. upādāna] “taking up completely,” i. e. using up, consummation, consumption, finishing, end M.I,487 (kaṭṭha°, opp. to upādāna); S.I,152; III,16 sq. (cetaso p., cp. pariyādāya & °dinna); IV,33 (sabb’upādāna°) A.II,139; J.V,186. Cp. BSk. paryādāna Divy 4, 55, 100. -- Esp. in foll. phrases: āsava° & jīvita° D.I,46 (jīvita-pariyādānā Abl., expl^d at Dh.I,128 as “jīvitassa sabbaso pariyādinnattā parikkhīṇattā puna appaṭisandhika-bhāvā ti attho”); S.II,83=A.II,198; S.III,126; IV,213; A.IV,13, 146; Pug.13; Miln.397; and comb^d with parikkhaya in °ṁ gacchati to be exhausted or consummated A.V,173= Sn.p. 126; Miln.102; PvA.147, cp. BSk. parikṣayaṁ paryādānaṁ gacchati Divy 567; AvŚ I.48; II,193. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyādāti: {'def': '(pari+a+da+a=pari+ādāti),极端地继续(to take up in an excessive degree)，用尽(to exhaust)。【过分】pariyādinna。【独】pariyādāya。【被】pariyādiyati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+ādāti] to take up in an excessive degree, to exhaust. Only in secondary forms of med-pass. ādiyati, pp. °ādinna, ger. ādāya (q. v.). (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyādāya: {'def': '(indecl.) [ger. of pariyādati] 1. taking all round, summing up, completely Nd² 533 (in explⁿ of ye keci, as synonymous with sabbato, i. e. for completeness, exhaustively). -- 2. exhausting, overpowering, enticing, taking hold of, as cittaṁ p. “taking hold of the mind” M.I,91; It.19; DhA.I,15. -- 3. losing control over, giving out (cittaṁ) S.III,16; IV,125. In absolute sense perhaps at S.V,51=A.IV,127 (with vv. ll. pariyenāya & pariyāya). (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyāgata: {'def': '[pari+ā+gata] having come to, reached, attained J.VI,237 (phalaṁ; C=upagata), 238 (kusalaṁ; C.=pariyāyena attano vārena āgata). (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyāgāra: {'def': '(adj.) [pari+āgāra] having the house all round, entirely surrounded by the house Vin.III,119 (of gabbha). (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyāhanana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pari+ā+han] striking, beating Vism.142 (āhanana° in exposition of vitakka)=DhsA.114 (“circumimpinging” Expos. 151). (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. pari+ā+han) ,【中】撞击，撞(striking, beating Vism.142 (āhanana- in exposition of vitakka)=DhsA.114 (“circumimpinging” Expos. 151)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyāhanati: {'def': '(pari+ā+han+a) 撞击，撞。【过】pariyahani。【过分】pariyahata。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyāhata: {'def': '[pari+āhata] struck out, affected with (-°), only in phrase takka° “beaten out by argumentations” D.I,16 (cp. DA.I,106); M.I,520. (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pariyahanati的【过分】) 已撞击，已撞。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyāpadāna: {'def': '(nt.) [pari+apadāna, the latter for ava°, and metrical lengthening of a] good advice, application, trick, artfulness, artifice J.V,361, 369. (C. expln^d as parisuddha after v. l. pariyodāta which was prob. misread for pariyodāna), 370. (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyāpajjati: {'def': '[pari+āpajjati] to be finished A.IV,339. ‹-› pp. pariyāpanna (q. v.). -- Caus. pariyāpādeti (q. v.). (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pari+āpajjati) 被完成(to be finished)。【现分】pariyāpanna。【使】pariyāpādeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyāpanna: {'def': '[pari+āpanna, cp. adhipanna] 1. “gone completely into,” included in, belonging to, got into Vin.I,46 (patta° that which has been put into the bowl); D.I,45 (=ābaddha DA.I,127); SnA 397 (milakkhabhāsa° etc.); KhA 136 (vinaya°), 191 (saṅgha°); DhA.I,158 (idhaloka-paraloka°); PvA.14, 33, 59, 129 (devaloka°), 150. -- 2. accomplished (i. e. gone into the matter), thorough, mastering (said of vācā) S.II,280 =A.II,51. -- 3. (°ā dhammā) the Included, viz. all that is contained in the threefold cycle of existence (i. e. the worlds of sense, form & formless) Dhs.1268; Vbh.12, 15, 19 & passim; DhsA.50. Opp. apariyāpannā (dhammā) the Unincluded (viz. all that is exempt from this cycle) Ps.I,101; Dhs.583 (cp. Dhs.trslⁿ 165, 254, 329, 332), 992, 1242; Kvu 507. (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(【过分】)已包含，已属於，已进入。【反】apariyāpanna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyāpannatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. pariyāpanna] includedness SnA 174. (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyāputa: {'def': '[pp. of pariyāpuṇāti] 1. learned by heart, known Nd¹ 234=Nd² 386 (Buddhavacana). -- 2. learned, accomplished DA.I,21. -- See also pariyatta². (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pariyāpuṇati的【过分】) ,已精通。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariyāpuṇana: {'def': '【中】学习。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. formⁿ fr. pariyāpuṇāti] mastery over, accomplishment in (Gen.) Vism.442 (Buddhavacanassa). (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyāpuṇāti: {'def': '(pari+a+pu+ṇa) ,彻底地学习，精通。【过】pariyāpuni。【过分】pariyāputa。【独】pariyapuṇitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+āp, cp. BSk. paryavāpnoti Divy 613] 1. to learn (by heart), to master, to gain mastership over, to learn thoroughly Vin.IV,305 (parittaṁ a charm); D.I,117 (=jānāti DA.I,117); A.III,86 (dhammaṁ); fut. pariyāpuṇissati DhA.I,382 (dhammaṁ); ger. pariyāpuṇitvā S.I,176; II,120; SnA 195 (nikāyaṁ). -- 2. (with inf.) to know (to do something), to be able to Vin.II,109 (aor. °iṁsu), 121. -- pp. pariyāputa and pariyatta (q. v.). (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyāpādeti: {'def': '[Caus. of pariyāpajjati] to finish off, i. e. put to death completely S.IV,308 sq.=A.III,94. (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyāti: {'def': '(pari+ya+a) ,四处走动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+yā] 1. to go round (Acc.) J.I,307. -- 2. to come near J.II,440. (Page 432)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariyāya: {'def': '[fr. pari+i, cp. Class. Sk. paryāya in all meanings, already Vedic in meaning of “formula,” in liturgy, cp. below 4] lit. “going round” analysed by Bdhgh in 3 diff. meanings, viz. vāra (turn, course), desanā (instruction, presentation), and kāraṇa (cause, reason, also case, matter), see DA.I,36 and cp. Kindred Sayings I,320. -- 1. arrangement, disposition, in phrase °ṁ karoti to arrange D.I,179 (trslⁿ takes it literally “departure,” i. e. going out of one’s way, détour; or change of habit, see Dial I.245); M.I,252, 326; III,7, 62; S.I,142 (trsl. “make occasion” [for coming]). ‹-› 2. order, succession, turn, course (=vāra) D.I,166 ≈ (°bhatta i. e. feeding in turn or at regular intervals; expl^d as vāra-bhatta PugA 232); M.I,78, 282, 481; S.II,51 sq.; A.II,206; J.V,153 (=vāra); PvA.242 (aparā°). -- 3. what goes on, way, habit, quality, property S.I,146 (ceto° habits of mind, thoughts, but see also pariya); A.V,160 (citta°, see ceto). -- 4. discussion, instruction, method (of teaching), discourse on (-°), representation of (-°) (=desanā); thus āditta° (of Vin.I,34) DhA.I,88; esp. in cpd. dhamma° disquisition on the Dhamma D.I,46; II,93; M.I,83; III,67; S.II,74; V,357; A.III,62; IV,166, 381; Sn.p. 218; also in foll.: vitakka° M.I,122; deva° A.III,402 sq.; peta° PvA.92; cp. Vism.41 (°kathā). -- 5. in Abhidhamma terminology, specifically: pariyāyena, the mode of teaching in the Suttanta, ad hominem, discursively, applied method, illustrated discourse, figurative language as opposed to the abstract, general statements of Abhidhamma=nippariyāyena, nippariyāyato Vism.473, 499; cp. DhsA.317 (figuratively). -- 6. mode, manner, reason, cause, way (=kāraṇa) D.I,185 (iminā °ena), 186 (id.); II,339 (ayaṁ p. yena °ena); DA.I,106 (tena tena °ena in some way or other); DhsA.366 (iminā °ena for this reason); esp. in phrase aneka-pariyāyena in many (or various) ways Vin.I,16, 45; D.I,1 (cp. DA.I,36), 174; M.I,24; A.I,56; Sn.p. 15. -- 7. winding round (of a tree: branch), in doubtful reading at J.VI,528 (see pariyā). -- See also nippariyāya. (Page 433)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. pari+i, cp. Class. Sk. paryāya),【阳】(lit. “going round” analysed by Bdhgh in 3 diff. meanings, viz. vāra (turn, course), desanā (instruction, presentation), and kāraṇa (cause, reason, also case, matter)。1.安排(arrangement, disposition, in phrase pariyāyaṁ karoti to arrange D.I,179; or change of habit, see Dial I.245); 2.命令，旋转，课程(order, succession, turn, course (=vāra)。3.继续，道路，习惯，份量(what goes on, way, habit, quality, property)。pariyayakatha,【阴】大约谈话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pari°: {'def': '(indecl.) [Idg. *peri to verbal root *per, denoting completion of a forward movement (as in Sk. pṛ², piparti. to bring across, promote; cp. Vedic pṛc to satisfy, pṛṇāti to fill, fulfill. See also P. para). Cp. Vedic pari, Av. pairi, Gr. pέri, Lat. per (also in adj. per-magnus very great); Obulg. pariy round about, Lith. per̃ through, Oir er- (intensifying prefix), Goth. faír, Ohg. fir, far=Ger. ver-] prefix, signifying (lit.) around, round about; (fig.) all round, i. e. completely, altogether. The use as prep. (with Acc.=against, w. Abl.=from) has entirely disappeared in Pāli (but see below 1a). As adv. “all round” it is only found at J.VI,198 (parī metri causa; comb^d with samantato). ‹-› The composition form before vowels is pariy°, which in combⁿ with ud and upa undergoes metathesis, scil. payir°. Frequent comb^ns with other preps. are pari +ā (pariyā°) and pari+ava (pariyo°); sampari°. Close affinities of p. are the preps. adhi (cp. ajjhesati› pariyesati, ajjhogāhati›pariyogāhati) and abhi (cp. abhirādheti›paritoseti, abhitāpa›paritāpa, abhipīḷita›pari°, abhipūreti›pari°, abhirakkhati›pari°), cp. also its relation to ā in var. comb^ns. -- Meanings. 1. (lit.) (a) away from, off (cp. Vedic pari as prep. c. Abl.:) °kaḍḍhati to draw over, seduce, °cheda cutting off, restriction, °puñchati wipe off. -- (b) all round, round (expl^d by samantato, e. g. at Vism.271 in pallaṅka): °anta surrounded, °esati search round, °kiṇṇa covered all round (i. e. completely, cp. explⁿ as “samantato ākiṇṇa”), °carati move round, °jana surrounding people, °dhāvati run about, °dhovati wash all round, °paleti watch all round, fig. guard carefully, °bhamati roam about, °maṇḍala circular (round), °sā assembly (lit. sitting round, of sad). -- 2. (fig.) (a) quite, completely, very much, kat) ecoxήn: °ādāna consummation, °āpanna gone completely into, °odāta very pure, °osāna complete end, °gūhati to hide well, °toseti satisfy very much, °pūreti fulfil, °bhutta thoroughly enjoyed, °yañña supreme sacrifice, °suddha extremely clean. -- (b) too much, excessively (cp. ati° and adhi°): °tāpeti torment excessively, °pakka over-ripe. -- A derivation (adv.) from pari is parito (q. v.). On its relation to Sk. pariṣ see parikkhāra. A frequently occurring dialectical variant of pari° is pali° (q. v.). -- Note. The explⁿ of P. Commentators as regards pari is “pariggahaṭṭho” Ps.I,176; “paricca” SnA 88; “parito” VvA.316; PvA.33. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariñña: {'def': '(-°) [the adj. form of pariññā, cp. abhiñña] knowing, recognising, understanding It.44 (bhūta° so, or should we read bhūtapariññāya?); also in cpd. pariññacārin (to be exp^d as shortened gr. pariññā?) Sn.537 (=paññāya paricchinditvā caranto living in full knowledge, i. e. rightly determining); also (abstr.) pariññatthaṁ at It.29 (abhiññatthaṁ+), cp. S.IV,253. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariññeyya: {'def': '【中】应该被正确地知道的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of parijānāti] knowable, perceivable, to be known (accurately) M.I,4; S.III,26; IV,29; DhA.IV,233 (cp. Nd² under abhiññeyya). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariññā: {'def': '(梵 parijñā),【阴】，精确的知识(exact knowledge)，遍知、完全的理解( full understanding)。三遍知(tisso pariññā)：一、知遍知(ñāta pariññā)--包括「名色分别智」与「缘摄受智」；二、审察遍知(tīrāṇa pariññā，亦作度遍知)--「思惟智」和「生灭随观智」的作用是审察与辨明一切名色法及其诸因的无常、苦与无我三相。三、断遍知(pahāna pariññā)--从「坏灭随观智」(bhaṅga ñāṇa)开始的观智，见到一切名色法及其诸因的坏灭，和这些法的无常、苦与无我三相。於此暂时断除烦恼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (indecl.) [ger. of parijānāti for *parijñāya, cp. same short forms of ādā & abhiññā] having full knowledge or understanding of Sn.779 (=parijānitvā Nd¹ 56 & SnA 518); It.4 (perhaps to be read pariññāya for pariññā so). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. parijñāna; the form parijñā given by BR only with the one ref. Vyutp. 160; fr. pari+jñā] accurate or exact knowledge, comprehension, full understanding M.I,66, 84; S.III,26 (yo rāgakkhayo dosā° moha° ayaṁ vuccati p.), 159 sq., 191; IV,16, 51, 138, 206, 253 sq.; V,21, 55 sq., 145, 236, 251, 292; A.I,277 (kāmānaṁ rūpānaṁ vedanānaṁ), 299; V,64; Pug.37; Nett 19, 20, 31; KhA 87; SnA 251. -- In exegetical literature three pariññās are distinguished, viz. ñāta°, tīraṇa° pahāna°, which are differently interpreted & applied according to the various contexts. See e. g. the detailed interpretation at Nd¹ 52 sq.; Nd² 413; J.VI,259 (where ñāṇa° for ñāta°); DhA.II,172 (in ref. to food); mentioned at SnA 517. -- adj. pariñña. -- The form pariññāya is an apparent Instr., but in reality (in form & meaning) the ger. of parijānāti (like abhiññāya›abhijānitvā) for the usual parijānitvā. It is freq. found in poetry & in formulas (like yathābhūtaṁ p.); its meaning is “knowing well in right knowledge”: S.V,182; Sn.455, 737, 778 (=parijānitvā Nd¹ 51 sq.), 1082 (corresp. with pahāya, cp. similar phrase pahāya parijānitvā DhA.IV,232); It.62; J.VI,259. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': "ñāta- , tīraṇa - , pahāna-p ., belong to the exegetical literature, but they are already implied in Pts.M. I. 87: ' Abhiññā-paññā ñātatthe ñāṇaṃ , pariññā-paññā tīranatthe ñāṇaṃ , pahāna-paññā pariccāgatthe ñāṇaṃ ... ye ye dhammā abhiññātā honti , te te dhammā ñāta honti ... tīritā ... pahīnā.'", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Pariññāta: {'def': '完全知道。参考Parijānāti(肯定，了解，真知)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of parijānāti] well understood, thoroughly known Th.2, 106; M.I,1 sq.; S.II,99; V,182; PvA.1, 287. With ref. to food (°bhojana & °āhāra) it means food understood according to the three pariññās (q. v.); Dh.92 (°bhojano adj. one who lives on recognised food or takes the right view of the food he eats, cp. DhA.II,172); Miln.352 (°āhāro); contrasted with bhāvita: consciousness is to be well studied, insight is to be made to grow M.I,293. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariññātatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. pariññāta] the fact of having full or exact knowledge S.V,182. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariññātāvin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pariññāta] one who has correct knowledge S.III,159 sq., 191 (puggala). (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariññāya: {'def': '(parijānāti的【独】)肯定后，了解后。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariḍahati: {'def': '[pari+ḍadati] to burn: Pass. pariḍayhati to be burnt or scorched M.I,422; S.I,188=Th.1, 1224; A.I,137; III,95, 98; Sn.63; Ps.I,128 (ḷ); Pv.I,6⁴ (=parito jhāyati PvA.33); Miln.303; PvA.60. Cp. pariḷāha. (Page 425)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariḷāha: {'def': '(pari+ḍah)﹐【阳】热恼，苦恼，热。pariḷāhanānatta﹐种种热恼。pariḷāhasamaya﹐热时。uṇhasamaya﹐暑时。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+ḍāha of ḍah, cp. pariḍahati. On change of ḍand see Geiger, P.Gr. § 42³] burning, fever; fig. fever of passion, consumption, distress, pain D.III,238 (avigata°), 289 (°nānatta); M.I,101 (kāme); S.II,143 sq. (°nānatta), 151 (kāma°; vyāpāda°, vihiṁsā°); III,7 sq. (taṇhā, pipāsā, p.), 190 (vigata°); IV,387; V,156 (kāyasmiṁ), 451 (jāti°, jarā°); A.I,68 (kāma°), 137 (rāgaja, mohaja etc.); II,197 (vighāta); III,3, 245 sq., 388 sq.; IV,461 sq.; Sn.715 (=rāgajo vā dosajo vā appamattako pi p. SnA 498); Dh.90 (cp. DhA.II,166: duvidho p. kāyiko cetasiko ca); Nd² 374 (kāma°); J.II,220; Miln.97, 165, 318; ThA.41, 292; VvA.44; PvA.230. (Page 435)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariṇamati: {'def': '[pari+namati] 1. to change (trs. & intrs.), lit. to bend round, to turn (round), to be transformed into (Acc.) S.III,3 (reading pariṇamati once, at other passages vi°, cp. p. 40); Miln.136 (bhojanaṁ visamaṁ p. food changes, i. e. turns bad), 277 (id.); VvA.13; PvA.144 (for parivattati Pv.II,10⁵), 194 (id. III,4⁴). -- 2. to change into a diff. state, to ripen, mature (often said of the fœtus) Miln.93, 358. -- pp. pariṇata (q. v.). ‹-› Caus. pariṇāmeti (q. v.). (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariṇata: {'def': '[pp. of pariṇamati] 1. bent down, crooked VvA.222 (°dāṭhā fangs, or does it mean “long”?). -- 2. changed S.III,40. -- 3. ripened, matured, hatched, ripe J.III,174, 286, 431, VvA.288; DhA.I,47 (gabbha). (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariṇeti: {'def': '[pari+neti] to lead round or about S.II,128. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariṇāha: {'def': '[fr. pari+nah] compass, circumference, breadth, extent, girth S.II,206 (of the moon)=A.V,19; J.III,192, 277, 370; V,299; Pug.53; Miln.282, 311; SnA 382 (āroha+). (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariṇāma: {'def': '[fr. pari+nam, cp. class Sk. pariṇāma in all meanings] “bending round,” i. e. 1. change, alteration, in utu° (sudden) change of season, unseasonable weather, with ref. to illnesses caused by such (°ja ābādhā)=illness arising from the change of season A.II,87; III,131; V,110; Nd² 304¹; Miln.112, 135 sq., 304; Vism.31. -- 2. alteration of food, digestion, in phrase sammā-pariṇāmaṁ gacchati M.I,188; S.I,168; A.III,30; cp. MVastu I.211. -- 3. ripening Miln.93. ‹-› 4. course, development, fulfilment, in special sense: dispensation, destiny J.V,171; Pv IV.3²⁵; PvA.252, 254. -- Cp. vi°. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariṇāmana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. parinamati] diverting to somebody’s use Vin.IV,157. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】【中】挪为某人使用(diverting to somebody’s use)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariṇāmati: {'def': '(pari+nam+a) 被转换成，成熟，到期，消化。【过】pariṇami。Yena ca santappati yena ca jiriyati yena ca pariḍayhati yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṁ sammā pariṇāmaṁ gacchati.(由於它(身)被温暖，由於它而衰老，由於它而被烧，由於它所食、所饮、所嚼、所尝正当地消化。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariṇāmeti: {'def': '(pari+nam+e)挪用，充用，获得，换成，变化，斡旋。【过】parinamesi。【过分】pariṇāmita。【独】parinametvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of parinamati] to bend to, to change into, to turn to use for somebody, to procure for, obtain, appropriate D.I,92; Vin.III,259 (puttassa rajjaṁ p. for his son); IV,156; PvA.281. -- ppr. °ṇāmayamāna J.V,424. See also āvajjeti. -- pp. pariṇāmita (q. v.). (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariṇāmin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pariṇāma] ending in, resulting in (--°) M.I,11, 526; III,88. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariṇāmita: {'def': '[pp. of pariṇāmeti] 1. bent down J.VI,269 (of trees, overladen with fruit, C. expl^s as “entangled”). -- 2. issued, apportioned, destined J.V,171; PvA.254. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariṇāmitar: {'def': '[n. ag. of pariṇāmeti] one who destines or makes develop, fate, destiny J.VI,189. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pariṇāta: {'def': '(Pariṇāmati的【过分】), 已被转换成，已成熟，已到期。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pariṇāyaka: {'def': '﹐【阳】引导者，领袖。pariṇāyakaratana﹐【中】转轮王的主帅。【阴】pariṇāyikā﹐女领袖，洞察力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pari+ni, cp. pariṇeti] a leader, guide, adviser; one of the 7 treasures (ratanāni) of a great king or Cakkavattin (according to Bdhgh on D.II,177; the eldest son; in the Lal. Vist. a general cp. Divy 211, 217; Senart, Lég. de Buddha p. 42), i. e. a wonderful Adviser D.I,89; II,17, 177; M.I,220; II,175; A.III,151; Sn.p. 106 (cp. SnA 450=DA.I,250); J.I,155; IV,93; Miln.38, 314. -- f. pariṇāyikā. Ep. of wisdom, synonymous with paññā, i. e. insight, cleverness Dhs.1057; Pug.25; Vism.3; DhsA.148. (Page 426)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paro: {'def': '【无】在远处，更进一步地，更远地，此外，在上面，向上，以上，不止。parovara, parovariya,【形】高低的。parosata,【形】不止一百的。parosahassa,【形】不止一千的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】在远处，更进一步地，更远地，此外，在上面，向上，以上，不止。 ~vara, ~variya,【形】高低的。 ~sata,【形】不止一百的。 ~sahassa,【形】不止一千的。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [cp. Vedic paras; to para] beyond, further, above, more than, upwards of; only °-in connection with numerals (cp. Vedic use of paras with Acc. of numerals), e.g. paropaññāsa more than 50 D.II,93; parosataṁ more than 100 J.V,203, 497; parosahassaṁ over 1,000 D.II,16; S.I,192=Th.1, 1238; Sn.p. 106 (=atireka-sahassaṁ SnA 450). See also parakkaroti. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parodati: {'def': '(pa + rud + a), 大声呼喊，悲叹。【过】 parodi。【独】 ~ditvā。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+rud] to cry out (for) J.I,166; PvA.16, 257. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+rud+a), 大声呼喊，悲叹。【过】parodi。【独】paroditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parokkha: {'def': '(paro-akkha,眼界之外),【形】看不见之处，背地里。parokkhe,【处】在缺席中，在背后(台语：尻脊后kha ciah au7，尻川后kha chng au7)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [paro+akkha=Vedic parokṣa (paraḥ+ akṣa)] beyond the eye, out of sight, invisible, imperceptible, Miln.291. -- Abl. parokkhā (adv.) behind one’s back, in the absence of J.III,89 (parammukhā C.; opp. sammukhā). (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】为眼睛所不能及的，视野以外的。 ~khe, 【处】在缺席中，在背后。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paropariya: {'def': '(°ñāṇa) see under indriya°. The form is paro +pariya, paro heŕe taking the place of para. Yet it would be more reasonable to explain the word as para+ apara (upara?)+ya, i. e. that which belongs to this world & the beyond, or everything that comes within the range of the faculties. Cp. parovara. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parovara: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [para+avara, sometimes through substitution of apa for ava also paropara. We should expect a form *parora as result of contraction: see Nd² p. 13] high & low, far & near; pl. in sense of “all kinds” (cp. uccâvaca). The word is found only in the Sutta Nipāta, viz. Sn.353 (v. l. BB varāvaraṁ, varovaraṁ; expl^d as “lokuttara-lokiya-vasena sundar’âsundaraṁ dūre-santikaṁ vā” SnA 350), 475 (°ā dhammā; v. l. BB paroparā; expl^d as “parâvarā sundar’âsundarā, parā vā bāhirā aparā ajjhattikā” SnA 410), 704 (kāme parovare; v. l. BB paropare; expl^d as sundare ca asundare ca pañca kāmaguṇe” SnA 493), 1048 (reading paroparāni Nd²; see explⁿ Nd² 422^b; expl^d as “parāni ca orāni ca, par’attabhāva-sak’attabhāv’ādīni parāni ca orāni ca” SnA 590), 1148 (paroparaṁ Nd²; see Nd² 422^a; expl^d as “hīna-ppaṇītaṁ” SnA 607). -- Note. Already in RV. we find para contrasted with avara or upara; para denoting the farther, higher or heavenly sphere, avara or upara the lower or earthly sphere: see e. g. RV. I.128, 3; I,164, 12. -- On paropara see further Wackernagel, Altind. Gr. II.121 d. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Paropara (para+avara) 【形】【中】高低的，高低(high & low, far & near; pl. in sense of “all kinds”)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parābhava: {'def': '【阳】毁灭(ruin)，耻辱(disgrace)，退化(degeneration)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. parā+bhū Vedic parābhava] defeat, destruction, ruin, disgrace S.II,241; A.II,73; IV,26; Sn.91--115; J.III,331; SnA 167. (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parābhavati: {'def': '(parā+bhū+a) ,衰退，受毁灭。declines; goes to ruin.【过】parābhavi。【过分】parābhūta。【现分】parābhavanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[parā+bhū] 1. to go to ruin Sn.91 (=parihāyati vinassati). -- 2. to win through, to surpass Th.1, 1144 (cp. trsl. 381⁴). -- pp. parābhūta (q. v.). See also parābhetvā. (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parābhetvā: {'def': 'at J.V,153 is not clear (C.: hadayaṁ bhinditvā olokento viya . . .); perhaps we have here a reading parābh° for parāg° (as bheṇḍuka wrongly for geṇḍuka), which in its turn stands for parādhetvā (cp. similarly BSk. ārāgeti for ārādheti), thus meaning “propitiating.” (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parābhūta: {'def': '[pp. of parābhavati] ruined, fallen into disgrace M.II,210 (avabhūta+). -- Note. parābhūta at J.V,416 is to be read parabhuta (q. v.). (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parādhīna: {'def': '【形】倚赖他人的，属於他人的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parājaya: {'def': '【阳】败北(defeated)，输(losing at play)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[parā+ji, opp. of jaya] 1. defeat D.I,10; J.VI,209; VvA.139. -- 2. defeat in game, loss, losing at play S.I,149 (dhana°)=A.V,171=Sn.659; J.VI,234 (°gāha sustainment of a loss). (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parājeti: {'def': '[parā+jeti of ji, cp. jayati] to defeat, conquer; in gambling: to make lose, beat PvA.151 (sahassaṁ p. by 1,000 coins). -- aor. parāji in 3^rd pl. °jiṁsu, only in one stock phrase referring to the battle of the Gods & Titans, viz. at D.II,285=M.I,253 (°jiniṁsu)=S.I,221= 224 (v. l. °jiniṁsu)=A.IV,432 (°jiyiṁsu, with v. l. °jiniṁsu), where a Pass. is required (“were defeated, lost”) in opp. to jiniṁsu, and the reading °jiyiṁsu as aor. pass. is to be preferred. -- Pass. °jīyati to be defeated, to suffer defeat S.I,221 (Pot. parājeyya, but form is Active); J.I,290; and parajjhati (1^st pl. parajjhāma) J.II,403; aor. parājiyi: see above parāji. -- pp. parājita (q. v.). (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(parā+ji +e) 击败，征服，使服从，赢，胜。【过】parājesi。【过分】parājita。【现分】parājenta。【独】parājetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parājita: {'def': '[pp. of parājeti] defeated, having suffered a loss Vin.IV,5; S.I,224; A.IV,432; Sn.440, 681; Dh.201 (=parena parājito DhA.III,259, where Bdhgh takes it evidently as Instr. of para=parā); J.I,293; II,160 (sahassaṁ), 403. (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parājīyati: {'def': '(parājeti的【被】), 已被击败。【过】parājīyi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parākaroti: {'def': 'see parakkaroti (paraṁ°? or parā?). (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parāmasa: {'def': '[parā+mṛś, but see parāmāsa] touching, seizing, taking hold of M.I,130 (v. l. °māsa which reading is probably to be preferred, cp. Trenckner on p. 541); S.III,46 (v. l. °māsa). -- neg. aparāmasa not leading astray, not enticing D.I,17 (°to), 202. -- Perhaps we should read parāmāsa altogether. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐Parāmāsa,【阳】parāmasana,【中】碰触，抓持(touching, seizing, taking up)。【三】传染。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parāmasana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. parāmasati] touching, seizing, taking up Nd² 576 (daṇḍa-sattha°); DhsA.239 (aṅgapaccaṅga°); PvA.159 (kiriyā°). (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parāmasati: {'def': '(pari+ā+mas(梵mrw)+a), 触摸，坚持，被执著，爱抚。【过】parāmasi。【过分】parāmasita。【现分】parāmasanta。【独】parāmasitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[para+masati of mṛś] to touch, hold on to, deal with, take up, to be attached or fall a victim to (Acc.) Vin.II,47, 195, 209; D.I,17; M.I,257; S.III,110; J.IV,138; in combⁿ with gaṇhāti & nandati (abhiniveseti) at Nd² 227. -- ger. parāmassa D.II,282; M.I,130, 498 (but cp. p. 541); grd. parāmasitabba J.I,188. -- pp. parāmaṭṭha (q. v.). (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parāmaṭṭha: {'def': '(pp. of parāmasati；cp. BSk. aparāmrsta) 触摸，抓取(touched, grasped, usually in bad sense: succumbing to, defiled, corrupted)。【反】dupparāmaṭṭha﹐apparāmaṭṭha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of parāmasati] touched, grasped, usually in bad sense: succumbing to, defiled, corrupted D.I,17; for a different, commentarial interpretation see Parāmāsa (evaṁ° so acquired or taken up; cp. DA.I,107: nirāsaṅka-cittatāya punappuna āmaṭṭha); S.II,94; Nd² 152 (gahita p. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. gahessasi No. 227); Dhs.584, 1177, 1500; Sdhp.332. --dup° wrongly grasped, misused S.I,49. --apparāmaṭṭha [cp. BSk. aparāmṛṣta not affected Mvyutp. p. 84] untarnished, incorrupt D.II,80 (cp. Dial II.85); III,245; S.II,70; A.III,36. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parāmāsa: {'def': '[parā+mṛś, cp. Epic Sk. parāmarśa being affected by; as philos. term “reflection”] touching, contact, being attached to, hanging on, being under the influence of, contagion (Dhs. trsl. 316). In Asl. 49, Bdhgh analyses as parato āmasantīti parāmāsā: p. means “they handle dhamma’s as other” (than what they really are, e. g. they transgress the real meaning of anicca etc. and say nicca). Hence the renderings in Asl. trs. “Reversion,” in Dialogues III,28, 43, etc. “perverted” (parāmasāmi parāmaṭṭha) -- S.III,46, 110; A.II,42 (sacca°); III,377 (sīlabbata°), 438 (id.); V,150 (sandiṭṭhi°); D.III,48; Th.1, 342; It.48 (itisacca°, cp. idaṁsaccabhinivesa under kāyagantha); Pug.22; Dhs.381, 1003, 1175 (diṭṭhi° contagion of speculative opinion), 1498 (id.). It is almost synonymous with abhinivesa; see kāyagantha (under gantha), and cp. Nd² 227 (gāha p. abhinivesa) and Nd² under taṇhā III, 1 C.-See also parāmasa. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parāmāsin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. parāmāsa] grasping, seizing, perverting D.III,48; M.I,43, 96 (sandiṭṭhi°). (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parāyana: {'def': '(Parāyaṇa) (nt.) [fr. parā+i, cp. Vedic parāyaṇa highest instance, also BSk. parāyaṇa e. g. Divy 57, 327] 1. (n.) final end, i. e. support, rest, relief S.I,38; A.I,155, 156 (tāṇa lena dīpa etc.); J.V,501=VI,375 (dīpañ ca p.). -- 2. (adj. --°) (a) going through to, ending in, aiming at, given to, attached to, having one’s end or goal in; also: finding one’s support in (as daṇḍa° leaning on a stick M.I,88; A.I,138), in foll. phrases prevalent: Amata° S.V,217 sq.; tama° Pug.51; Nibbāna° S.IV,373; V,218; brahmacariya° S.I,234; Maccu° S.V,217; sambodhi° D.I,156; II,155; Pug.16. Cp. also Sn.1114 (tap°=tad°, see Nd² 411); Miln.148 (ekantasoka°); DhA.I,28 (rodana, i. e. constantly weeping). ‹-› (b) destined to, having one’s next birth in., e. g. Avīci° J.III,454; IV,159; duggati° PvA.32; devaloka° J.I,218; brahmaloka° J.III,396; Miln.234; sagga° J.VI,329; PvA.42, 160; sugati° PvA.89 similarly nīlamañca° Pv.II,2⁵. See also pārāyana. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parāyatta: {'def': '【形】属於他人的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parāyaṇa: {'def': 'Parāyana(‹parā向其他+i去, cp. Vedic parāyaṇa highest instance, also BSk. parāyaṇa),【中】归宿，彼岸，支持，休，息减，最终，(在【合】中)瞄准，终止在，注定要(final end, i. e. support, rest, relief)。【形】归宿。【无】suggaparāyaṇa = 注定要出生在天堂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parāyika: {'def': 'see sam°. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parāyin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. parāyana] having one’s refuge or resort (in), being supported, only neg. aparāyinī (f.) without support J.III,386. (Page 421)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parā°: {'def': '(prefix) [para+ā, not Instr. of para: see para 2 c; in some cases it may also correspond to paraṁ°] prep. meaning “on to,” “over” (with the idea of mastering), also “through, throughout.” The ā is shortened before double consonant, like parā+kṛ=parakkaroti, parā+ kram=parakkamati (see under cpds. of para). (Page 420)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parīta: {'def': 'see vi°. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parūpaghāta: {'def': '【阳】伤害他人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】伤害他人。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parūpakkama: {'def': '【阳】敌人的进攻。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】敌人的进攻。(p215)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Parūpavāda: {'def': '【阳】被他人指责，他人的责备。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】被他人指责，他人的责备。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Parūpa°: {'def': 'as para+upa° (in parūpakkama, parūpaghāta etc.) see under para. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Parūḷha: {'def': '(parūhati 的【过分】), 已变长。 ~kesa, 【形】有长头发的。(p216)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of pa+ruh, cp. BSk. prarūḍha (-śmaśru) Jtm 210] grown, grown long, mostly in phrase °kaccha-nakha-loma having long nails, & long hair in the armpit, e. g. at S.I,78; Ud.65; J.IV,362, 371; VI,488; Miln.163 (so read for p.-kaccha-loma); Sdhp.104. ‹-› Kern, Toev. II.139 s. v. points out awkwardness of this phrase and suspects a distortion of kaccha either from kesa or kaca, i. e. with long hairs (of the head), nails & other hair. -- Further in foll. phrases: mukhaṁ p. bearded face J.IV,387; °kesa-nakha-loma J.I,303; °kesa-massu with hair & beard grown long J.IV,159; °kaccha with long grass J.VI,100; °massu-dāṭhika having grown a beard and tooth DA.I,263. (Page 439)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(parūhati 的【过分】), 已变长。parūḷhakesa,【形】有长头发的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasada: {'def': '【阳】花鹿。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】花鹿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasaha: {'def': '(‹pa+sah胜过), 克服，掌握(overcoming, mastering)。duppasaha,【形】难克服(hard to overcome)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+sah] overcoming, mastering, in dup° (adj.) hard to overcome J.II,219; Miln.21. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasahana: {'def': '【中】克服，征服。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】克服，征服。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pasahati: {'def': '[pa+sah] to use force, subdue, oppress, overcome M.II,99; Sn.443; Dh.7, 128; DhA.III,46; J.IV,126, 494; V,27. -- ger. pasayha using force, forcibly, by force D.II,74 (okkassa+); A.IV,16 (id.); S.I,143; Sn.72; J.I,143; Pv.II,9²; II,9¹⁰; (read appasayha for suppasayha); Miln.210 (okassa+; for okkassa?). Also in cpd. pasayha-kārin using force J.IV,309; V,425. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + sah + a), 使用武力，使服从，压迫。【过】 pasahi。【独】~hitvā, pasayha。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+sah胜过+a), 使用武力，使服从，压迫。【过】pasahi。【独】pasahitvā, pasayha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasajati: {'def': '[pa+sṛj] to let loose, produce; to be attached to Sn.390 (=allīyati SnA 375). (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasakkati: {'def': '[pa+sakkati] to go forth or out to; ger. pasakkiya S.I,199=Th.1, 119; Th.1, 125. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasakkhita: {'def': 'at J.IV,365 is doubtful; perhaps we should read pasakkita (pp. of pasakkati); the C. expl^s as “lying down” (nipanna acchati, p. 367); Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes change to pamakkhita on ground of vv. ll. vamakkhita & malakita. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasammati: {'def': '[pa+śam] to become allayed, to cease, to fade away Th.1, 702. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasanna: {'def': '¹ (adj) [pp. of pasīdati] 1. clear, bright Sn.550 (°netta); KhA 64 & 65 (°tilatelavaṇṇa, where Vism.262 reads vippasanna°); Vism.409 (id.). -- 2. happy, gladdened, reconciled, pleased J.I,151, 307; Vism.129 (muddha°). -- 3. pleased in one’s conscience, reconciled, believing, trusting in (Loc.), pious, good, virtuous A.III,35 (Satthari, dhamme Saṅghe); S.I,34 (Buddhe); V,374; Vv 5⁹; Sn.698; Dh.368 (Buddha-sāsane); J.II,111; DhA.I,60 (Satthari). Often comb^d with saddha (having faith) Vin.II,190; PvA.20, 42 (a°), and in cpd. °citta devotion in one’s heart Vin.I,16; A VI,209; Sn.316, 403, 690; Pv.II,1⁶; SnA 490; PvA.129; or °mānasa Sn.402; VvA.39; PvA.67; cp. pasannena manasā S.I,206; Dh.2. See also abhippasanna & vippasanna. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pp. of pa+syad] flowing out, streaming, issuing forth; in assu-pasannaṁ shedding of tears S.II,179. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pasīdati 的【过分】) 1. 已清除，已明亮。 2. 已取悦。 3. 已信仰。~citta, ~mānasa, 【形】喜悦的心，投入的心。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pasīdati 的【过分】) 1.已清除，已明亮。2.已取悦。3.已信仰。pasannacitta, pasannamānasa,【形】喜悦的心，投入的心。A.4.33./II,34.︰“Yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṁ aggamakkhāyati. Ye, bhikkhave, ariye aṭṭhaṅgike magge pasannā, agge te pasannā. Agge kho pana pasannānaṁ aggo vipāko hoti.(诸比丘！无论多少的有为法，八支圣道称为它们(当中)最上。诸比丘！凡信仰八支圣道者，信仰是它们的最上，而在最上的信仰，有最上果报。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasannā: {'def': '(f.) [late Sk. prasannā] a kind of spirituous liquor (made from rice) J.I,360. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasaraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+sṛ] stretching, spreading, being stretched out PvA.219 (piṭṭhi°). See also pasāraṇa. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pa+sr动转)【中】伸展(stretching, spreading, being stretched out)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasata: {'def': '² (nt.) [etym.? Late Sk. pṛṣat or pṛṣad a drop; cp. phusita¹ rain-drop=pṛṣata; BR. under pṛṣant= pasata¹, but probably dialectical & Non-Aryan] a small measure of capacity, a handful (seems to be applied to water only) J.I,101 (°mattaṁ udakaṁ); IV,201 (udaka°); V,382 (°mattaṁ pānīyaṁ). Often redupl. pasataṁ pasataṁ “by handfuls” M.I,245, J.V,164. At DA.I,298 it is closely connected with sarāva (cup), as denoting the amount of a small gift. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (Vedic prsant, f. prsatī),【形】(spotted, only in cpd. pasatamiga spotted antelope J.V.418 (v. l. pasadamiga). The more freq. P. form is pasada°, e. g. S.II,279 (gloss pasata)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (Late Sk. prsat or prsad a drop; cp. phusita1 rain-drop=prsata; probably dialectical & Non-Aryan), ,【阳】一把，巴沙答(谷粒或液体的衡量，4 把挲哒 = 1 西阿 (seer) 〔印度液量单位，约一公升〕。参考 Pattha)。(a small measure of capacity, a handful (seems to be applied to water only) J.I.101 (pasatamattaṁ udakaṁ); IV.201 (udakapasata); V.382 (pasatamattaṁ pānīyaṁ). Often redupl. pasataṁ pasataṁ “by handfuls” M.I,245, J.V.164. At DA.I,298 it is closely connected with sarāva (cup), as denoting the amount of a small gift.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】一把（米），把挲哒（谷粒或液体的衡量，4 把挲哒 = 1 西阿 (seer)〔印度液量单位，约一公升〕。参考 Pattha）。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [Vedic pṛṣant, f. pṛṣatī] spotted, only in cpd. °miga spotted antelope J.V,418 (v. l. pasada°). The more freq. P. form is pasada°, e. g. S.II,279 (gloss pasata°); J.V,24, 416; VI,537; SnA 82. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasattha: {'def': 'pasaṭṭha, (pasaŋsati 的【过分】), 已赞美，已委托。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(& Pasaṭṭha) [pp. of pasaṁsati] praised, extolled, commended S.I,169; J.III,234; Vv 44²¹; Miln.212, 361. As pasaṭṭha at Pv.II,9⁷³ (so to be read for paseṭṭha); IV,1⁵² (=vaṇṇita PvA.241); DhsA.124. Pasada. See pasata¹. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'pasaṭṭha, (pasaṁsati 的【过分】), 已赞美，已委托。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasava: {'def': '【阳】流出，提出，子孙。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+su] bringing forth, offspring S.I,69. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pa+su (梵sru)流动),【阳】流出，提出，子孙(bringing forth, offspring)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasavana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+su] 1. giving birth PvA.35. ‹-› 2. producing, generating, effecting PvA.31 (puñña°). (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pa+su),【中】1.分娩(giving birth)。2.生产，招致(producing, generating, effecting)。puññapasavana, 生福。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasavati: {'def': '(pa + su + a), 提出，生，流动，累积。【过】 pasavi。【过分】 ~vita。【现分】 ~vanta。【独】 ~vitvā。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+su] to bring forth, give birth to, beget, produce; mostly fig. in combⁿ with the foll. nouns: kibbisaṁ to commit sin Vin.II,204; A.V,75; pāpaṁ id. Pv IV.1⁵⁰; puññaṁ to produce merit S.I,182, 213; A.V,76; PvA.121; opp. apuññaṁ Vin.II,26; S.I,114; veraṁ to beget hatred S.II,68; Dh.201. -- Caus. pasaveti in same meaning J.VI,106 (pāpaṁ) -- pp. pasūta (q. v.). (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+su+a), 提出，生，流动，累积。【过】pasavi。【过分】pasavita, pasūta。【现分】pasavanta。【独】pasavitvā。【使】pasaveti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasayha: {'def': '(ger. of pasahati),【独】强制地，强行。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'is ger. of pasahati (q. v.). (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【独】强制地，强行。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pasaŋsaka: {'def': '【阳】称赞者，奉承者。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pasaŋsana: {'def': '【中】 Pasaŋsā, 【阴】称赞，赞赏。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pasaŋsati: {'def': '(pa + saŋs + a), 称赞，委托。【过】 pasaŋsi。【过分】 ~sita,pasattha。【现分】 ~santa。【潜】 ~sitabba, ~siya。【独】 sitvā。【不】~situŋ。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pasaṁsaka: {'def': '[fr. pasaṁsati] flatterer M.I,327; J.II,439; Sdhp.565. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】称赞者，奉承者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasaṁsana: {'def': '【中】pasaṁsā,【阴】称赞，赞赏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+ śaṁs] praising, commendation Pug.53; Sdhp.213; PvA.30. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasaṁsati: {'def': '[pa+saṁs] to speak out, praise, commend, agree D.I,163; S.I,102, 149, 161; J.I,143; II,439; V,331; It.16; Sn.47, 163, 390, 658, 906; Dh.30; Pv.II,9⁴²; DA.I,149; PvA.25, 131 (=vaṇṇeti). -- pp. pasattha & pasaṁsita (q. v.). Cp. paṭipasaṁsita. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+saṁs称赞+a), 称赞，委托。【过】pasaṁsi。【过分】pasaṁsita, pasattha。【现分】pasaṁsanta。【义】pasaṁsitabba, pasaṁsiya。【独】pasaṁsitvā。【不】pasaṁsituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasaṁsita: {'def': '[pp. of pasaṁsati, cp. pasattha] praised S.I,232; Sn.829, 928; Dh.228, 230; Nd¹ 169; PvA.116 (=vaṇṇita) 130. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasaṁsiya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of pasaṁsati, cp. Vedic praśaṁsia] laudable, praiseworthy S.I,149; III,83; A.II,19; Sn.658; J.I,202; Sdhp.563. Cp. pasaṁsā. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasaṁsā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. pa+śaṁs; cp. Vedic praśaṁsā] praise, applause D.III,260; S.I,202; Th.1, 609; Sn.213, 826, 895; Miln.377; SnA 155. In composition the form is pasaṁsa°, e. g. °āvahana bringing applause Sn.256; °kāma desirous of praise Sn.825, cp. Nd¹ 163; °lābha gain of praise Sn.828. As adj. pasaṁsa “laudable, praiseworthy” it is better taken as grd. of pasaṁsati (=pasaṁsiya); thus at Pv IV.7¹³ (pāsaṁsa Minayeff); PvA.8, 89 (=anindita). (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasaṅga: {'def': '【阳】倾向，执着，事件，场合。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+sanj. Class Sk. prasaṅga in both meanings] 1. hanging on, inclination, attachment to KhA 18; PvA.130. -- 2. occasion, event; Loc. pasaṅge at the occasion of (--°), instead of KhA 213 (karaṇavacana°, where PvA.30 in id. p. reads karaṇ’atthe). (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】倾向，执著，事件，场合。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasaṅkamati: {'def': '[pa+saṁ+kram] to go out or forth to (Acc.) Sdhp.277. -- pp. pasaṅkanta. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasaṅkanta: {'def': '[pp. of pa+saṅkamati, of kram] gone out to, gone forth PvA.22. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasaṭa: {'def': '(pasarati 的【过分】；pa+sr), 已张开，已遮蔽(表面)( let out, produced)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pasarati 的【过分】), 已张开，（用撒布之物）已遮蔽（表面）。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of pa+sṛ] let out, produced D.III,167; SnA 109 (conj. for pasava in explⁿ of pasuta). (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasenadi: {'def': '（国王名）巴谢那地，（古音译：）波斯匿，钵罗犀那恃多', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Paseṭṭha: {'def': 'at Pv.II,9⁷³ is to be read pasaṭṭha (see pasattha). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasibbaka: {'def': '【阳】钱包，麻布袋，袋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. nt.) [fr. pa+siv, late Sk. prasevaka› P. pasebbaka›pasibbaka, cp. Geiger. P.Gr. 15¹] a sack, Vin.III,17; J.I,112, 351; II,88, 154; III,10, 116, 343 (camma° leather bag); IV,52, 361; V,46 (pūpa°), 483; VI,432 (spelling pasippaka); DA.I,41; DhA.IV,205. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】钱包，麻布袋，袋。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pasibbita: {'def': '[pp. of pa+siv] sewn up, enveloped by (-°) Th.1, 1150 (maṁsa-nahāru°). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasodheti: {'def': '[pa+Caus. of śudh] to cleanse, clean, purity D.I,71 (cittaṁ). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passa: {'def': '2【阳】【中】1.旁边(side)，侧面(flank)。2.斜坡(mountain slope)。【处】pasmani (= passe)。Himavantassa passato, 雪山山麓。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、中】旁边，侧面。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1 (cp.Sk.pawya,‹passati),【阳】【现分】看见(seeing, one who sees)。【处】passe。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [cp. Sk. paśya, fr. passati] seeing, one who sees Th.1, 61 (see Morris, in J.P.T.S. 1885, 48). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (m. & nt.) [Vedic pārśva to parśu & pṛṣṭi rib, perhaps also connected with pārṣṇi side of leg, see under paṇhi] 1. side, flank M.I,102; III,3; A.V,18; Sn.422; J.I,264; III,26. Pleonastic in piṭṭhi° (cp. E. backside) the back, Loc. behind J.I,292; PvA.55. -- 2. (mountain-) slope, in Himavanta° J.I,218; V,396 (Loc. pasmani=passe C.). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passaddha: {'def': '(passambhati 的【过分】)。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(passambhati 的【过分】)轻安。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of passambhati, cp. BSk. praśrabdha Divy 48] calmed down, allayed, quieted, composed, aṭ ease. Almost exclusively with ref. to the body (kāya), e. g. at Vin.I,294; D.III,241, 288; M.I,37; III,86; S I 126; IV,125; A.I,148; V,30; Vism.134; VbhA.283 (°kāyapuggala). -- In lit. applⁿ °ratha when the car had slowed down J.III,239. See also paṭi°. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passaddhatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. passaddha] calmness, repose Nd² 166. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passaddhi: {'def': '【阴】平静，宁静。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+sambh(梵pra+wrambh)使平静、平息),【阴】轻安。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '轻安、宁静。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. pa+śrambh] calmness, tranquillity, repose, serenity M.III,86; S.II,30; IV,78; V,66; A.IV,455 sq.; Ps.II,244; Dhs.40 (kāya°), 41 (citta°), cp. Dhs. trsl. 23; Vism.129; VbhA.314 (kāya°, citta°); DhsA.150 (=samassāsa-ppatta). Often comb^d with pāmujja & pīti, e. g. D.I,72, 73, 196; Nett 29, 66. Six passaddhis at S.IV,217 (with ref. to vācā, vitakka-vicārā, pīti, assāsa-passāsā, saññā-vedanā, rāga-dosa-moha, through the 4 jhānas etc.). Passaddhi is one of the 7 sambojjhaṅgas (constituents of enlightenment): see this & cp. M.III,86; Vism.130, 134=VbhA.282 (where 7 conditions of this state are enum^d). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passambhanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. passambhati] allayment, calmness, composure Dhs.40, 41, 320. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】轻安。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】镇静，平静。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Passambhati: {'def': '(pa + sambh + a), 冷静，安静。【过】 ~mbhi。【独】 ~bhitvā。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+sambh+a), 【使】使轻安(to calm down, quiet, allay)。【过】passambhi。【独】passambhitvā。【现分】passambhayaṁ, 正在轻安、正在使...轻安(M.I,56; III,82, 89)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of passambhati] to calm down, quiet, allay M.I,56, 425; S.III,125; Vism.288 (=nirodheti). ppr. passambhayaṁ M.I,56; III,82, 89. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[pa+śrambh] to calm down, to be quiet Vin.I,294 (fut °issati); D.I,73; M.III,86; S.V,333; A.III,21. -- pp. passaddha; Caus. passambheti (q. v.). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passambheti: {'def': '(pa+sambh +e), 使轻安。【过】passambhesi。【过分】passambhita。【独】passambhetvā。【现分】passambhenta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + sambh + e), 使平静，使镇静。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~bhita。【独】 ~bhetvā。【现分】 ~bhenta。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Passanā: {'def': 'see anu°, vi°. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passasati: {'def': '[pa+śvas] to breathe in D.II,291; M.I,56; III,82; J.III,296; V,43; Vism.271; DhA 1.215. See also assasati & remarks under ā¹ 3. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + sas + a), 呼出（呼吸）。【过】 passasi。【过分】 ~sita。【独】~sitvā。【现分】 ~santa。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+sas(梵wvas)吹+a), 呼出(呼吸)。【过】passasi。【过分】passasita。【独】passasitvā。【现分】passasanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Passati: {'def': '[Vedic paśyati & *spaśati (aor. aspaṣṭa, Caus. spāśayati etc.); cp. Av. spasyeiti, Gr. skέptomai, (E. “scepsis”); Lat. species etc.; Ohg. spehon=Ger. spāhen (E. spy). -- The paradigm pass°, which in literary Sk. is restricted to the pres. stem (paś) interchanges with the paradigm dakkh° & dass° (dṛś): see dassati¹] 1. to see -- Pres. passati Vin.I,322; S.I,69, 132, 198; II,29; Sn.313, 647, 953, 1063, 1142 (cp. Nd² 428); Pv.I,2³; Miln.218; PvA.11, 102; 1^st pl. passāma Sn.76, 153, 164; Pv.I,10¹ (as future); imper. sg. passa Sn.435, 580, 588, 756; J.I,223; II,159; Pv.II,1¹⁶, 1¹⁹; PvA.38; pl. passatha S.II,25; Sn.176 sq., 777, & passavho (cp. Sk. paśyadhvaṁ) Sn.998. -- ppr. passaṁ (see Geiger, P.Gr. 97²) M.II,9; Sn.739, 837, 909; & passanto J.III,52; PvA.5, 6; f. passantī S.I,199. -- grd. passitabba J.IV,390 (a°). -- fut. passissati Pv.II,4⁶; PvA.6. -- aor. passi J.II,103, 111; III,278, 341. -- 2. to recognise, realise, know: only in combⁿ with jānāti (pres. jānāti passati; ppr. jānaṁ passaṁ): see jānāti 11. -- 3. to find Sn.1118 (=vindati paṭilabhati Nd² 428^b); J.III,55; Pv.II,9⁹. -- Cp. vi°. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(dis说明(梵paw观)+a), 看，见，找，明白。【过】passi。【过分】diṭṭha。【现分】passanta, passamāna。【独】passitvā, disvā。‘passaṁ na passatīti’﹐见不可见(正在看而看不见)。1pl. passāma。imper. sg. passa。pl. passatha & passavho (cp. Sk. pawyadhvaṁ)。ppr. passaṁ & passanto。f. passantī。grd. passitabba。fut. passissati。aor. passi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(dis + a, dis 被改成 pas), 看，见，找，明白。【过】 passi。【过分】diṭṭha。【现分】 ~santa, passamāna。【独】 passitvā, disvā。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Passavati: {'def': '[pa+sru] to flow forth, to pour out Miln.180. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passaya: {'def': '[fr. pa+śri, cp. Class. Sk. praśraya reverence] refuge Cp. III,10⁴. -- Note. °passaya in kaṇṭakapassaya J.III,74, & kaṇṭakāpassayika D.I,167 (kaṇṭh°); J.IV,299 (kaṇṭaka°) is to be read as °apassaya (apa+śri). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. imper. passa of passati, +ka] only in cpd. ehipassika (q. v.). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passitabba: {'def': '【义】适合被看到。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【潜】适合被看到。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Passituŋ: {'def': '【不】要看。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Passituṁ: {'def': '【不】看(to see)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Passiya: {'def': '(passati 的【独】), 看到了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(passati 的【独】), 看到了。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Passupati: {'def': '[pa+svap] to sleep, rest, aor. passupi; fut. passupissati J.V,70. 71. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passāsa: {'def': '【阳】呼气。 ~sī, 【阳】呼气的人。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】呼气。passāsasī,【阳】呼气的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+śvas] inhaled breath, inhalation S.I,106, 159; Ps.I,95, 164 sq., 182 sq. Usually in combⁿ assāsapassāsa (q. v.). At Vism.272 passāsa is expl¹ as “ingoing wind” and assāsa as “outgoing wind.” (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passāsin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. passāsa] breathing; in ghuru-ghuru° snoring S.I,117. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Passāva: {'def': '[fr. passavati] urine (lit. flowing out) Vin.II,141; IV,266 (p. muttaṁ vuccati); D.I,70 (uccāra+); M.III,3, 90; J.I,164 (uccāra-passāvaṁ vissajjeti), 338; V,164, 389; Vism.235 (uccāra°).

--doṇikā a trough for urine Vin.II,221; Vism.235. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】小便，尿。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】小便，尿。passāvamagga,【阳】小便道(尿道urethra)，阴道(阴道与尿道是不同管道，但古代常用「尿道」呼作「阴道」)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasu: {'def': '【阳】畜牲，四脚动物。 ~pati, 【阳】湿婆（印度三大神中司破坏之神），大自在天。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic paśu, cp. Lat. pecu & pecunia, Gr. pέkos fleece, Goth. vieh, E. fee] cattle M.I,79; J.V,105; Pv.II,13¹² (°yoni); Miln.100; PvA.166 (°bhāva); n. pl. pasavo S.I,69; Sn.858; Gen. pl. pasūnaṁ Sn.311; Pv.II,2⁵. -- dupasu bad cattle Th.1, 446. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】畜牲，四脚动物。pasupati,【阳】湿婆(印度三大神中司破坏之神)，大自在天。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasuka: {'def': '=pasu Vin.II,154 (ajaka+). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasura: {'def': '(adj.) [reading doubtful] many, abundant J.VI,134 (=rāsi, heap C.). We should probably read pacura, as at J.V,40 (=bahu C.). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasuta: {'def': '【形】经营的，执着的，做的。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of pa+sā or si, Sk. prasita, on change of i to u see Geiger, P.Gr. § 19³. In meaning confounded with pasavate of pa+su] attached to (Acc. or Loc.), intent upon (-°), pursuing, doing D.I,135 (kamma°); Sn.57 (see Nd² 427), 709, 774, 940, Dh.166, 181; Vism.135 (doing a hundred & one things: aneka-kicca°); DhA.III,160; PvA.151 (puñña-kammesu), 175 (kīḷanaka°), 195, 228 (pāpa°). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】经营的，执著的，做的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasāda: {'def': '【阳】晴朗，明亮，欢喜，信心，感官。 ~ka, 【形】明亮化的，令人清楚的，令人喜爱的，令人快乐的。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+sad, cp. Vedic prasāda] 1. clearness, brightness, purity; referring to the colours (“visibility”) of the eye J.I,319 (akkhīni maṇiguḷa-sadisāni paññāyamāna pañca-ppasādāni ahesuṁ); SnA 453 (pasanna-netto i. e. pañca-vaṇṇa-ppasāda-sampattiyā). In this sense also, in Abhidhamma, with ref. to the eye in function of “sentient organ, sense agency” sensitive surface (so Mrs Rh. D. in Dhs. tsrl. 174) at DhsA.306, 307. -- 2. joy, satisfaction, happy or good mind, virtue, faith M.I,64 (Satthari); S.I,202; A.I,98, 222 (Buddhe etc.); II,84; III,270 (puggala°); IV,346; SnA 155, PvA.5, 35. -- 3. repose, composure, allayment, serenity Nett 28, 50; Vism.107, 135; ThA.258. -- Note. pasāda at Th.2, 411 is to be read pāsaka (see J.P.T.S. 1893 pp. 45, 46). Cp. abhi°. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】明净，明亮，欢喜，信心，感官，净色(pasādarūpa；sensitivity elements。眼、耳、鼻、舌、身中能识知外境的色法。净色即是透明的色聚，五净色都是透明的，其他的色聚都是非明净(非透明的))。pasādaka,【形】明亮化的，令人清楚的，令人喜爱的，令人快乐的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasādaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pasāda] 1. making bright Miln.35 (udaka° maṇi). -- 2. worthy, good, pious PvA.129 (a°). Cp. pāsādika. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasādana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+sad] 1. happy state, reconciliation, purity PvA.132. -- 2. granting graces, gratification DhA.III,3 (brahmaṇo mama p. °ṭṭhāne pasīdati he is gracious instead of me giving graces). -- Cp. sam°. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasādaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pasāda] inspiring confidence, giving faith S.V,156; Pug.49, 50; VbhA.282 (°suttanta); Sdhp.543; the 10 pāsādaniyā dhammā at M.III,11 sq. Cp. sam°. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】激发信心的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】激发信心的。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pasādeti: {'def': '[Caus. of pa+sad, see pasīdati] to render calm, appease, make peaceful, reconcile, gladden, incline one’s heart (cittaṁ) towards (Loc.) D.I,110, 139; S.I,149; A.V,71; Pv.II,9⁴² (cittaṁ); Miln.210; PvA.50, 123 (khamāpento p.). -- Cp. vi°. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+sad坐+e), 使喜悦，使洁净，使忠实，转换。【过】pasādesi。【过分】pasādita。【现分】pasādenta。【独】pasādetvā。【义】pasādetabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + sad + e), 使喜悦，使洁净，使忠实，转换。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dita。【现分】 ~denta。【独】 ~detvā。【潜】 ~detabba。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pasādhana: {'def': '【中】装饰。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+sādh; cp. Class. Sk. prasādhana in same meaning] ornament, decoration, parure J.II,186 (rañño sīsa °kappaka King’s headdress-maker i. e. barber); III,437; IV,3 (ura-cchada°); DhA.I,227 (°peḷikā), 342 (°kappaka), 393; ThA.267; VvA.165, 187; PvA.155. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】装饰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasādheti: {'def': '[Caus. of pa+sādh] to adorn, decorate, array Mhvs VII.38; DhA.I,398. -- pp. pasādhita (q. v.). (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + sādh + e), 装饰，布署。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dhita。【独】~dhetvā, ~dhiya。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+sādh+e), 装饰，布署。【过】pasādhesi。【过分】pasādhita。【独】pasādhetvā, pasādhiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasādhita: {'def': '[pp. of pasādheti] adorned, arrayed with ornaments, embellished, dressed up J.I,489 (maṇḍita°); II,48 (id.); IV,219 (id.); V,510 (nahāta°). (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasādiyā: {'def': 'at J.VI,530 is doubtful; it is expl^d in C. together with saṁsādiyā (a certain kind of rice: sūkara-sāli), yet the C. seems to take it as “bhūmiyaṁ patita”; v. l. pasāriya. Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it as rice plant & compares Sk. *prasātikā. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasākha: {'def': '【中】从主干分支的身体（即：大腿等）。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [pa+sākhā; Epic Sk. praśākhā branch] 1. a smaller branch J.VI,324 (sākha°). -- 2. branch-like wood, i. e. hard wood Th.1, 72. -- 3. the body where it branches off from the trunk, i. e. abdomen & thighs; the lower part of the body Vin.IV,316 (=adho-nābhi ubbha-jānu-maṇḍalaṁ C.). Cp. Suśruta II.31, 10. ‹-› 4. the extremities (being the 5^th stage in the formation of the embryo) S.I,206. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+sākhā；梵 prawākhā branch),【阳】【中】1.小分枝(J.VI.324. sākhapasākha)。2.像小树枝。3.从主干分支的身体(即：腹部、大腿等)。4.钵罗奢佉(the extremities。受胎后第五个七日至第三十八个七日(出生之时)之间，手足已形成)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasākhā: {'def': '【阴】小分枝，小树枝。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pasāraṇa: {'def': '【中】伸展，传布。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+sṛ, cp. pasaraṇa] stretching out DA.I,196 (opp. sammiñjana); DhA.I,298 (hattha°). (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】伸展，传布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasāreti: {'def': '[Caus. of pa+sṛ] 1. to cause to move forwards, to let or make go, to give up J.VI,58 (pasāraya, imper.). -- Pass. pasāriyati Vism.318; PvA.240 (are turned out of doors). -- 2. to stretch out, hold out or forth, usually with ref. to either arm (bāhuṁ, bāhaṁ, bāhā) S.I,137 (opp. sammiñjeti); DA.I,196; PvA.112, 121; or hand (hatthaṁ) J.V,41; VI,282; PvA.113; or feet (pāde, pādaṁ) Th.2, 44, 49, cp. ThA.52; DhsA.324 (=sandhiyo paṭippanāmeti). -- 3. to lay out, put forth, offer for sale Vin.II,291; DhA.II,89. -- pp. pasārita (q. v.), Cp. abhi° (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[Caus. of pa+sr动转] 1. to cause to move forwards, to let or make go, to give up J VI.58 (pasāraya, imper.). -- Pass. pasāriyati ; (are turned out of doors). -- 2. 伸展(to stretch out, hold out or forth, usually with ref. to either arm (bāhuṁ, bāhaṁ, bāhā) (opp. sammiñjeti); or hand (hatthaṁ) ; or feet (pāde, pādaṁ); (=sandhiyo paṭippanāmeti). 3. to lay out, put forth, offer for sale. -- pp. pasārita , Cp. abhi°', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa+sar(梵sr)动转+e), 转动，伸展，传布，伸出，出售。【过】pasāresi。【过分】pasārita。【独】pasāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + sar + e), 伸展，传布，伸出，出售。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~rita。【独】 ~retvā。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pasārita: {'def': '(Pasāreti的【过分】), 已伸展。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pasāreti] 1. stretched out, usually in contrast with sammiñjita, e. g. at D.I,222; Vin.I,230; M.III,35, 90; S.I,137; Vism.19; VvA.6. -- 2. put forth, laid out, offered for sale Miln.I,336. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasāsana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+śās] teaching, instruction J.III,367. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pasāsati: {'def': '(pa+sās教+a), 教，规定，统治。【过】pasāsi。【过分】pasāsita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+śās] 1. to teach, instruct S.I,38; J.III,367, 443. -- 2. to rule, reign, govern D.II,257; Cp. III,14¹; PvA.287. (Page 446)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + sās + a), 教，规定，统治。【过】 pasāsi。【过分】 ~sita。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pasīdana: {'def': '【中】 Pasīdanā, 【阴】热爱，晴朗，满足。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pasīdati] calming, happiness, purification Ps.II,121 (SS passādana). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】pasīdanā,【阴】热爱，晴朗，满足。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasīdati: {'def': '[pa+sad] 1. to become bright, to brighten up PvA.132 (mukha-vaṇṇo p.). -- 2. to be purified, reconciled or pleased; to be clear & calm, to become of peaceful heart (mano or cittaṁ p.); to find one’s satisfaction in (Loc.), to have faith D.II,202; S.I,98; II,199 (sutvā dhammaṁ p.); A.III,248; Sn.356, 434, 563; Nd² 426 (=saddahati, adhimuccati okappeti); Vv 50¹⁴ (mano me pasīdi, aor.); Vism.129; Miln.9; DhA.III,3 (=he is gracious, i. e. good); VvA.6 (better v. l. passitvā); PvA.141. -- pp. pasanna (q. v.). See also pasādeti & vippasīdati. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + sad + a), 明亮化，被取悦，被洁净，被使清楚，被献身。【过】pasīdi。【过分】 pasanna。【独】 ~ditvā。【潜】 ~ditabba。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+sad坐+a), 明亮化，被取悦，被洁净，被使清楚，被献身。【过】pasīdi。【过分】pasanna。【独】pasīditvā。【义】pasīditabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasūta: {'def': '[pp. of pasavati] produced; having born, delivered PvA.80. (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pasavati 的【过分】), 已生产，已为…接生，已出生。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pasavati 的【过分】), 已生产，已为…接生，已出生。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pasūti: {'def': '【阴】带来，出生。pasūtikā,【阴】生过孩子的女人。pasūtighara,【中】产房。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. pa+su] bringing forth, birth, in °ghara lying-in chamber Nd¹ 120; Vism.235; KhA 58 (where Vism.259 reads sūtighara). (Page 447)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】带来，出生。 ~kā, 【阴】生过孩子的女人。 ~ghara, 【中】产房。(p219)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patana: {'def': '【中】落下。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt. adj.) [fr. patati] falling, falling out, ruin, destruction J.I,293 (akkhīni); II,154; III,188 (geha°); VI,85 (usu° range of his arrow). (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】落下。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Patanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. patana] on the point of falling, going to fall, falling J.VI,358. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patanu: {'def': '【形】非常瘦的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pa+tanu] very thin J.VI,578 (°kesa); Dhs.362 (°bhāva)=DhsA.238; Kvu 299 (id.). (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】非常瘦的。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patara: {'def': '[Vedic pradara, pa+dṛ, with t. for d.; see Trenckner, Notes 62¹⁶; Geiger, P.Gr. § 39, 4] a split, a slit J.IV,32. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patarati: {'def': '[pa+tarati] 1. to go through or forth, to run out, to cross over D.I,248; J.III,91 (aor. patari). -- 2. to overflow, boil over (of water) Miln.260. -- Caus. patāreti (q. v.). (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patati: {'def': '(pat落下+a), 跌倒，降落，(鸟)飞落(在树上)。【过】pati。【过分】patita。【现分】patanta。【独】patitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pat + a), 跌倒，降落，（鸟）飞落（在树上）。【过】 pati。【过分】patita。【现分】 patanta。【独】 patitvā。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Ved. patati, Idg. *pet “to fly” as well as “to fall.” Cp. Av. pataiti fly, hurry; Gr. pέtomai fly, w)kupέths quick, pi/ptw fall; Lat. praepes quick, peto to go for, impetus, attack etc.] to fall, jump, fall down on (Loc., Acc. & Instr.), to alight J.I,278 (dīpake); Sn.248 (nirayaṁ); Pv IV.10⁸ (1st pl. patāmase); Miln.187; PvA.45, ppr. patanto J.I,263 (asaniyā); III,188 (nāvāya); fut. patissati J.III,277; aor. pati Sn.1027 (sirasā); J.III,55; Pv.I,7⁸; ger. patitvā J.I,291; III,26; PvA.16; DhA.III,196 (vv. ll. papāta & papatā the latter aor. of papatati, q. v.); ger. patitvā J.I,291; III,26; PvA.16. ‹-› pp. patita (q. v.). -- Caus. pāteti (q. v.). Pass. (Caus.) patīyati is brought to fall also intrs. rush away J.IV,415 (=palāyati C.); Miln.187. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patatthi: {'def': 'at J.VI,276 is misprint for pathaddhi (q. v.). (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pateyya: {'def': 'in phrase alam-pateyya at D.III,71 (kumārikā alam-pateyyā), 75 (id.) means “surely fit to have husbands, ripe for marriage” (?) (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patha: {'def': '【阳】路径，方法，道路。 (在【合】中) 量，例： gaṇanapatha = 数量。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[of path, Ved. pathi with the 3 bases pathi, path° and panth°, of which only the last two have formed independent nouns, viz. patha and pantha (q. v.)] 1. path, road, way D.I,63; Sn.176 (Loc. pathe), 385, 540, 868; Nd² 485 B (+pantha, in explⁿ of magga); J.I,308 (Loc. pathe); II,39; VI,525 (Abl. pathā); Th.1, 64; Pug.22, 57; Mhvs 21, 24 (pathe); 36, 93 (Loc. pathi, see Geiger, Gr. § 89); Sdhp.241. -- 2. Very frequent as --°, where it is sometimes pleonastic, and acts in the function of an abstract formation in °tā or °ttaṁ (cp. similar use of anta: see anta¹ 5; and pada: see pada 3), e. g. anila° (air) J.IV,119; anupariyāya° A.IV,107; ādicca° (path of the sun, sky) DhA.III,177; ummagga° S.I,193; kamma° DhA.I,36; gaṇana° (range of) calculation Miln.20; cakkhu° J.IV,403 (=cakkhūnaṁ etaṁ nāmaṁ C.); catummahā° A.III,28, 42, 394; dve° Vv 53¹⁷; nakkhatta° Dh.208; yañña° (=yañña) Nd² 524; yogga° A.III,122; rajā° S.II,219; rāga° (sensuality) S.IV,70; vacana° (way of saying, speech) Vv 63¹⁷ (=vacana VvA.262), etc. See also cakkhu°, ñeyya°, dveḷhā°, manussa°, yañña°, vāda°, sagga°, hattha°; der. pātheyya. -- See also byappatha. --apatha where there is no way or road, wrong way J.II,287; ThA.255; VvA.337.

--addhan “the journey or stretch of the path”: see under addhan. --addhi (?) so perhaps to be read for patatthi, according to Fausböll J.VI,276. Unclear in meaning, expl^d by nibbiddha vīthi (frequented road?) --gamana “going on their course,” of the stars D.I,10 (see Dial. I.20 “their usual course”). (Page 408)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】路径，方法，道路。(在【合】中) 量，例： gaṇanapatha = 数量。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pathabya: {'def': '[fr. pathavi=paṭhavi] belonging to the earth, ruler of the earth (?) A.IV,90 (reading uncertain). (Page 408)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pathavi: {'def': 'see paṭhavi. (Page 408)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pathavī: {'def': '参考 Paṭhavī。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】地。参考 Paṭhavī。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pathāvin: {'def': '[fr. patha] a traveller Vin.IV,108; J.VI,65; DA.I,298. (Page 408)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pathāvī: {'def': 'pathika, 【阳】行人，旅行者。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'pathika,【阳】行人，旅行者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pati: {'def': '【阳】统治者，丈夫，主人。 ~kula, 【中】丈夫的家庭。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Ved. pati, Av. paitis lord, husband; Gr. pόsis husband, Lat. potis, potens, possum, hos-pes; Goth. brūp-faps bridegroom, hunda faps centurion, Lith. pāts husband] lord, master, owner, leader. -- 1. in general D.III,93 (khettānaṁ p. gloss adhipati). Mostly --°; see under gavam°, gaha°, dāna°, yūtha°, senā°. -- 2. husband S.I,210; Sn.314; J.III,138; PvA.161. See also sapatika (with her husband), patibbatā & patika.

--kula her husband’s clan ThA.283; VvA.206; --devatā a devoted wife J.III,406; VvA.128. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (indecl.) [Vedic prati etc.] a doublet of paṭi; both often found side by side; pati alone always as prep. (with Acc.) and as prefix with sthā (paṭiṭṭhāti, patiṭṭhita etc.). All cases are referred to the form with paṭi°, except in the case of patiṭṭh°. The more frequent cases are the foll.: patikāra, °kuṭati, °caya, °dissati, °nandati, °manteti, °māneti, °ruddha, °rūpa, °līna, °sallāna, etc. °sibbati, °sevati, °ssata, °ssaya, °ssava. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】统治者，丈夫，主人。patikula,【中】丈夫的家庭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Patibbatā: {'def': '(pati+vatā)【阴】真诚的妻子(a devoted wife)。AA.7.59：Patibbatāti patidevatā.(真诚的妻子：丈夫的天人)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】深爱的妻子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [pati+vatā] a devoted wife (cp. patidevatā) J.II,121; VI,533; VvA.56, 110. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】深爱的妻子。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patibujjhati: {'def': '(pati + budh + ya), 理解，醒来。【过】 ~jjhi。【独】 ~jhitvā。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patigādhappatta: {'def': '【形】已得立足、已安住的(patiṭṭhaṁ pattā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Patijīvan: {'def': '(-°) in phrase jīva-paṭijīvaṁ at J.II,15 is to be taken as a sort of redupl. cpd. of jīva, the imper. of jīvati “live,” as greeting. We might translate “the greeting with “jīva” and reciprocating it.” (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patika: {'def': '(adj.) [only f. patikā and only as --°] having a husband in mata° “with husband dead,” a widow Th.2, 221 (=vidhuva ThA.179); J.V,103 (ap° without husband, v. l. for appatīta, C. expl^ns by assāmika). pavuttha° (a woman) whose husband lives abroad Vin.II,268; III,83; Miln.205 (pavuttha°). See also pañcapatika & sapatika. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'at Vism.28 is to be read pātika (vessel, bowl, dish). Patiṭṭhahati (& Patiṭṭhāti) [paṭi+ sthā] to stand fast or firmly, to find a support in (Loc.), to be established (intrs.), to fix oneself, to be set up, to stay; aor. patiṭṭhahi DhA.III,175 (sotāpattiphale), PvA.42 (id.), 66 (id.); VvA.69 (sakadāgāmiphale); and patiṭṭhāsi Miln.16. -- fut. °ṭṭhahissati J.V,458 (°hessati); DhA.III,171. -- ger. patiṭṭhāya Sn.506; J.II,2 (rajje); III,52; V,458 (rajje); Miln.33; PvA.142. -- pp. patiṭṭhita (q. v.). ‹-› Caus. patiṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patikāra: {'def': '【阳】抵抗，补救，偿还。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】抵抗，补救，偿还(日语：へんさい,返済)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Patirūpa: {'def': '【形】适合的，适当的。参考 Paṭirūpa适合的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Paṭirūpa。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patissata: {'def': '【形】深思的，留心的。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】深思的，忆念的。(参考Paṭissata)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see paṭi°. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patita: {'def': '[pp. of patati] fallen Dh.68, 320; J.I,167; Miln.187; PvA.31 (read pātita), 56. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(patati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(patati 的【过分】)。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patitaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] thrown or fallen into (Loc.), dropped Vism.62. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patitiṭṭhati: {'def': '(pati + thā + a), 再站起来。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pati+ṭhā+a), 再站起来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+titthati] to stand up again Th.1, 173. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patittha: {'def': '[pa+tittha] a bank of a river or lake, su° (adj.) with beautiful banks S.I,90; Pv.II,1²⁰ (=sundaratittha PvA.77). (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pativirodha: {'def': '【阳】反对派，敌意。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patiññāta: {'def': '参考 patijānāti。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patiṭṭhahati: {'def': 'patiṭṭhāti (pati+ṭhā站+a), 被建立，站住(站稳)，找支援。【过】1.patiṭṭhahi, 2.patiṭṭhāsi。【过分】patiṭṭhita。【现分】patiṭṭhanta。【独】patiṭṭhahitvā, patiṭṭhāya。【不】patiṭṭhituṁ, patiṭṭhātuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'patiṭṭhāti (pati + ṭhā + a), 被建立，站住（站稳），找支持。【过】1. ~ṭhahi, 2. ~ṭhāsi。【过分】 patiṭṭhita。【现分】 ~hanta。【独】 ~ṭhahitvā,patiṭṭhāya。【不】 ~ṭhituŋ, ~ṭhātuŋ。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patiṭṭhita: {'def': '[pp. of patiṭṭhahati] established in (Loc.), settled, fixed, arrayed, stayed, standing, supported, founded in D.III,101 (supatiṭṭhita-citta); M.I,478; S.I,40, 45, 185 (dhammesu); It.77; Sn.409, 453; J.I,51 (kucchimhi), 262 (rajje); Pv.I,4⁴; II,9⁶⁹ (dussīlesu); Miln.282; VvA.110 (°gabbhā), 259 (°saddha); PvA.34 (jāta+) -- nt. °ṁ arrangement, settling, in pañca° the fivefold array, a form of respectful greeting, see under pañca. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patiṭṭhā: {'def': '【阴】帮忙，支持，休息处。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】帮忙，支援，休息处，依止处，渡津处。S.3.20./I,93.︰“Tasmā kareyya kalyāṇaṁ, nicayaṁ samparāyikaṁ; Puññāni paralokasmiṁ, patiṭṭhā honti pāṇinan”ti.(因此作善事，积善为来世，功德是后世，生灵渡津处。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. pati+ sthā. Cp. Ved. pratiṣṭhā support, foundation] support, resting place, stay, ground, help, also (spiritual) helper, support for salvation S.I,1 (ap°); II,65; III,53; Sn.173; Dh.332; J.I,149; IV,20; Miln.302; DhsA.261; VvA.138; PvA.53, 60 (=dīpa), 87 (=dīpa), 141 (su°), 174 (su°=dīpa). (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patiṭṭhāha: {'def': '[fr. patiṭṭhahati] having one’s footing in, hold on, tenacity Dhs.381=Nd² 271^III DhsA.253. The v. l. at Nd² is paṭiggāha which is also read by Dhs. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patiṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】安装，建立，支持。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭi+ sthā cp. late Sk. pratiṣṭhāna] fixing, setting up, support, help, ground (for salvation) Sn.1011: PvA.123. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】安住，建立，支援。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Patiṭṭhāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. of patiṭṭhahati, cp. BSk. praṭiṣṭhāpayati Jtm 224] to establish, set up, fix, put into, instal D.I,206; S.I,90; J.I,152; 168, 349 (sotāpatti-phale); PvA.22 (id.), 38 (id.) 50 (saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca), 223 (id.), 76 (ceṭiyaṁ), 78 (upāsakabhāve), 131, 132 (hatthe). -- aor. patiṭṭhāpesi J.I,138. -- pp. patiṭṭhāpita (q. v.). (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(patiṭṭhāti 的【使】), 建立，设立，安装。【过】patiṭṭhāpesi。【现分】patiṭṭhāpenta,【独】patiṭṭhāpetvā, patiṭṭhāpiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(patiṭṭhāti 的【使】), 建立，设立，安装。【过】 ~esi。【现分】~penta, 【独】 ~petvā, ~piya。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patiṭṭhāpetu: {'def': '【阳】创办人，建立者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】创办人，建立者。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patiṭṭhāpita: {'def': '[pp. of patiṭṭhāpeti] put down, set down, established PvA.139. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(patiṭṭhāpeti的【过分】) 已制定的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Patiṭṭhāpitar: {'def': '[n. ag. of patiṭṭhāpeti] one who establishes A.V,66. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patiṭṭhātabba: {'def': 'patiṭṭhitabba,【义】可以建立的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'patiṭṭhitabba, 【潜】可以建立的。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patiṭṭhīyati: {'def': '(only apparently (Pass.) to patiṭṭhahati, of sthā, but in reality=Sk. prati-sthyāyate, of sthyā, see thīna. Ought to be paṭitthīyati; but was by popular analogy with patiṭṭhāya changed to patiṭṭhīyati), 顽固、抗拒、叛逆(to be obdurate, to offer resistance)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[only apparently (Pass.) to patiṭṭhahati, of sthā, but in reality=Sk. prati-sthyāyate, of sthyā, see thīna. Ought to be paṭitthīyati; but was by popular analogy with patiṭṭhāya changed to patiṭṭhīyati] to be obdurate, to offer resistance A.I,124; II,203; III,181 sq.; J.IV,22 (aor. °ṭṭhīya); Pug.36; KhA 226. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patoda: {'def': '【阳】（赶牲口用的）刺棒，驾驶（马车）棒。 ~ka, 【中】踢马剌，用手指轻推。 ~laṭṭhi,【阴】驾驶者的棒。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa彻底+tud刺穿、伤害；cp.Ved.pratoda),【阳】(赶牲口用的)刺棒，驾驶(马车)棒。patodaka,【中】踢马剌，用手指轻挪(搔)。patodalaṭṭhi,【阴】驾驶者的棒、鞭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+tud cp. Ved. pratoda] a goad, driving stick, prick, spur M.I,124; III,97; S.IV,176; A.II,114; III,28; IV,91; V,324; Th.1, 210; J.I,57, 192; Dhs.16, 20, 292; Pug.25; SnA 147; ThA.174; Sdhp.367.

--laṭṭhi a driver’s stick, goad-stick [cp. BSk. pratodayaṣṭi Divy 7, 76, 463, 465] D.I,105, 126; J.VI,249; Miln.27; DhA.I,302; II,38; IV,216; VvA.64. As °yaṭṭhi at Dpvs XI.30. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patodaka: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. pa+tud] lit. pushing, spurring; only in phrase aṅguli° nudging with one’s fingers Vin.III,84 =IV.110 (here to be taken as “tickling”); D.I,91 (cp. Dial. I.113); A.IV,343. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patta: {'def': '1 (q.v.paṇṇa), 【中】1.翅膀，羽毛。2.叶子。一种棕榈叶(talipot；Corypha umbraculifera)贝叶树，锡兰叫ola，傣语叫lan(烂)，树高20米左右，长得高大、雄伟，树干笔直，浑圆，没有枝桠，树冠像一把巨伞，叶片象手掌一样散开，树龄可达60年左右)用於写经用，称为贝叶(贝多罗)(巴patta；梵pattra)。pattagandha,【阳】树叶的气味。pattakkhandha, (参考 Panna, Pannakkhandha 这样的连接词形比较适当)【形】气馁的，沮丧的，肩下垂的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2,【阳】钵。pattagata,【形】在钵里的。pattagāhaka,【阳】携带其他人的钵的人。pattathavikā,【阴】钵的套子。pattapānī,【形】在手上的钵。pattapiṇḍika,【形】一钵食(十三头陀支之一，第五头陀支)。M.139./III,235.：婆提(pāti瓯)，钵陀(vitta钵)，吃陀(patta碗)，沙罗瓦(sarāva杯)，达噜拔(dhāropa杅)，钵那(poṇa饮食器)，美系罗(pisīlava饮水器)，均为同一物。大钵──容纳半āḷhaka的饭（或其四分之一量的米）和一些菜。中钵──容纳一nāḷika的饭（或其四分之一量的米）和一些菜。小钵──容纳一pattha的饭（或其四分之一量的米）和一些菜。根据《インド学大事典》III, 389页：4 prastha（Pā.：pattha）＝1 adhaka （Pā.：āḷhaka）＝386g。《四分律》：「大（钵）者三斗，小者一斗半」（大22, 622上）。释妙因《佛制比丘六物图集解》，注：「姬周三斗，即今唐斗一斗。斗半，即今五升」。至於nāli，字典的解释大多是长度和时间的单位，只有在《The Book of the Discipline》I,103页‧注释1中提到：(1) 1 Sinhalese nāḷi＝1.5 Magadha nāḷi。(2) 1 Magadha＝13pala。所以1 Sinhalese nāḷi＝19.5 pala。又根据《インド学大事典》 III, 389页：1 pala＝6g。所以换算起来，1 nāli就有19.5×6g＝117g。也就是说，大钵──可以容纳386g的饭（或96g的米）和一些菜。中钵──可以容纳117g的饭（或29g的米）和一些菜。小钵──可以容纳96g的饭（或24g的米）和一些菜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pāpuṇāti 的【过分】), 已到达，已达到，已获得。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ [pp. of pāpuṇāti] obtained, attained, got, reached (pass. & med.) Sn.55, 138, 478, 517, 542, 992; Dh.134 (nibbānaṁ) 423; J.I,255 (vināsaṁ); IV,139 (samuddaṁ); PvA.4 (anayavyasanaṁ), 5 (sīsacchedaṁ), 71 (manussabhāvaṁ). Very frequent as --° and in meaning equal to finite verb or other phrase, when spelling °ppatta is restored (Sk. prāpta), e. g. ummādappatta out of mind PvA.6; jara° old J.III,394; dukkha° afflicted with pain J.VI,336; domanassa° dejected J.II,155; patti° attained one’s (possible) share It.32; bala° (become) strong D.II,157; vaya° (become) old, come of age J.II,421 (+soḷasa-vassa-kāle); PvA.68; somanassa° pleased J.III,74; haritu° covered with green M.I,343; J.I,50, 399. Also as °-, but less frequent, meaning often equal to prep. “with,” “after,” etc., as pattâbhiseka after consecration DhA.IV,84; SnA 484; pattuṇṇa with wool SnA 263; °dhamma mastering the Dh. Vin.I,16; the same at DhA.IV,200 in meaning of patti°, i. e. “merit attained”; °mānasa (?) It.76 (v. l. satta°); °sambodhi It.97 (v. l. satta°). -- Opp. appatta not obtained (see also patti 2), i. e. without Dh.272 (cp. DhA.III,58); Pug.51 (°pānabhojana, so read for appanna°). -- Cp. sam (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (m. & nt.) [Ved. pātra, fr. Idg. *pōtlom=Lat. poculum beaker, Oir. ōl. See pāna & pibati] a bowl, esp. the alms-bowl of a bhikkhu Vin.I,46, 50, 51, 61, 224 (patte pūresuṁ); II,111, 126, 224, 269; S.I,112; A.IV,344; Sn.413, 443; J.I,52, 55 (pattaṁ thavikāya pakkhipati), 69; III,535 (puṇṇa °ṁ deti to give a full bowl, i. e. plenty); V,389 (pl. pattāni); Vism.108 (āṇigaṇṭhik’āhato ayopatto); DhA.IV,220 (°ṁ pūreti); PvA.35, 61, 76, 88, 141. -- Two kinds of bowls are mentioned at Vin.III,243, viz. ayo° of iron & mattikā° of clay, dāru° a wooden bowl Vin.II,112, 143. uda° a bowl of water or a water-bowl M.I,100; S.V,121; A.III,230 sq. cp. odapattakinī. -- pattassa mukhavaṭṭi J.V,38. -- fut. pātī (q. v.).

--ādhāraka bowl support, bowl-hold Vin.II,113. --kaṇḍolikā a wicker-work stand for a bowl Vin.II,114 (cp. Vin. Texts III,86). --gata gone into the bowl, alms given Th.1, 155; Pv IV.7³. --gāhāpaka one who is going to take a bowl, a receiver of a b. Vin.II,177 (+sāṭiya° etc.); A.III,275. --cīvara bowl and robe (see note in Dial II.162) Vin.I,46; II,78, 194; S.I,76; J.III,379; Pv.II,13¹⁶; DA.I,45, 186; PvA.61. --tthavikā a bag to carry a bowl in Vin.II,114; J.III,364; VvA.40, 63; KhA 45. --dhovana “bowl-washing,” (the water used for) washing the bowl Vin.II,214. --pāṇin hand on bowl, bowl in hand Sn.713; It.89=S.III,93≈; onīta° removing the hand from the bowl: see onīta. --piṇḍika “eating from one vessel only” A.III,220. --maṇḍala a circular artificial bottom of a bowl Vin.II,112. --māḷaka a raised parapet (?) on which to put the bowl Vin.II,114 (cp. Vin. Texts III,86). --mūla the bottom of the bowl Vin.II,269. --vaṭṭi the brim of a bowl S.IV,168. --saññin paying attention to one’s bowl Vin.II,214. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '3 (pāpuṇāti 的【过分】), 已到达，已达到，已获得。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Ved. patra, to *pet as in patati (q. v. & see also paṇṇa); cp. Gr. pterόn wing, ptέruc id.; Lat. penna feather=Ger. fittig.; acci-piter; Ohg. fedara=E. feather etc.] 1. the wing of a bird, a feather Vin.IV,259; D.I,71. kukkuṭa° a hen’s quill (for sewing) Vin.II,215. -- 2. a leaf M.I,429; Sn.44=64 (sañchinna°, see Nd² 625); 625 (pokkhara° lotus l.); Dh.401 (id.); Nd¹ 135 (paduma°); Pv.II,9⁵ (=paṇṇa PvA.15); VvA.147 (tāla°); ThA.71; PvA.283 (nigrodha°). asi-patta-vana “sword-leaf-forest” (a forest in Niraya) Sn.673; PvA.221. -- 3. a small thin strip of metal at the lute Miln.53; VvA.281.

--āḷhalka a toy measure made of palm-leaves Vin.II,10; III,180; D.I,6 (cp. DA.I,86); M.I,266; A.V,203; Miln.229. --gandha odour of leaves Dhs.625. --nāḷī rib of a feather DhA.I,394. --phala leaf-fruit, a leaf and fruit, vegetables Sn.239 (=yaṁ kiñci harita-pannaṁ SnA 283); PvA.86. --yāna having wings as vehicle, “winggoer,” i. e. a bird Sn.606 (=pattehi yantī ti pattayānā SnA 465); J.II,443. --rasa taste of leaves Dhs.629; juice of leaves Vin.I,246 (+puppharasa & ucchurasa). --salākā leaf-ticket DhA.IV,65. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】钵。【中】叶子，羽毛，翅膀。 ~kkhandha, （参考 Panna,Pannakkhandha 这样的连接词形比较适当）【形】气馁的，沮丧的，肩下垂的。 ~gata, 【形】在钵里的。 ~gandha, 【阳】树叶的气味。 ~gāhaka,【阳】携带其他人的钵的人。 ~thavikā, 【阴】钵的套子。 ~pānī, 【形】在手上的钵。 ~piṇḍika, 【形】一钵食（十三头陀支之一，第五头陀支）。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '⁴ at Dpvs XI.18 for pattin or pattika, foot-man, infantry. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patta-kkhandha: {'def': '[perhaps patta¹+khandha, thus “leafshouldered,” i. e. with shoulders drooping like leaves; the Commentators explain patta as contracted form of patita fallen, thus “with shoulders falling.” We may have to deal with an old misspelling for panna (=pa+ nam bent down, put down), which explⁿ would suit the sense better than any other] downcast, dejected, disappointed Vin.II,77=III,162 (trsl^d “with fallen hearts,” expl^d as patita, see Vin. Texts III,13); S.I,124; M.I,132, 258; III,298; A.III,57; J.V,17; Miln.5. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattabba: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of pāpuṇāti] to be gained or attained; nt. that which can be attained or won SnA 443. See also pattiya². (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pāpunāti 的【潜】), 应该被得到，应该被达到，应该被到达。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pāpunāti 的【义】), 应该被得到，应该被达到，应该被到达。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pattaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. patta²] a (little) bowl Th.2, 28. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattali: {'def': '(°lī) (f.) [according to Kern, Toev. s. v. to be read as either sattali or sattalā] plantain Th.2, 260 (=kadali ThA.211). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattana: {'def': '(nt.) [*Sk. paṭṭana] a place, city, port J.I,121; IV,16, 137, V,75; PvA.53. -- °ka a sort of village J.VI,456. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattatta: {'def': '(nt.) (-°) [abstr. fr. patta³] the fact of being furnished or possessed with Vism.524. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattha: {'def': '² [cp. late Sk. prastha] a Prastha (certain measure of capacity)=1/4 of an Āḷhaka; a cooking utensil containing one Prastha DhA.II,154; SnA 476 (cattāro patthā āḷhakaṁ). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】粑铊(谷粒或液体的衡量，4 粑铊 = 1 西阿 (seer)〔印度液量单位，约一公升〕。参考 Pasata)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】粑铊（谷粒或液体的衡量，4 粑铊 = 1 西阿 (seer)〔印度液量单位，约一公升〕。参考 Pasata）。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [fr. pa+ sthā. Cp. Epic Sk. prastha plateau] a lonely place, in cpd. vana° D.I,71; Pug.59 etc., a wilderness in the forest, expl^d by Bdhgh as “gāmantaṁ atikkamitvā manussānaṁ anupacāra-ṭṭhānaṁ yattha na kasanti na vapanti” DA.I,210; Ud.43 (patthañ ca sayan’āsanaṁ, ed.; but better with id. p. Dh.185 as pantañ, which is expl^d at DhA.III,238 by “vivittaṁ,” i, e. separately). Cp. with this Sk. vana-prastha a forest situated on elevated land. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patthaddha: {'def': '【形】非常僵硬的。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】非常僵硬的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+thaddha] (quite) stiff Vin.II,192; Th.1, 1074. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patthanā: {'def': '【阴】瞄准，热望，欲望。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [of ap+arth, cp. Sk. prārthayati & prārthana nt., prārthanā f.] aiming at, wish, desire, request, aspiration, prayer S.II,99, 154; A.I,224; III,47; V,212; Nd¹ 316, 337 (p. vuccati taṇhā); Nd² 112; Nett 18, 27; Dhs.1059; Miln.3; SnA 47, 50; DhA.II,36; PvA.47. -- patthanaṁ karoti to make a wish J.I,68; DhA.I,48; °ṁ ṭhapeti id. DhA.I,47; II,83; IV,200. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵prāthanā),【阴】瞄准，热望，贪求。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Patthara: {'def': '【阳】厚平板，平坦的石头。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】厚平板，平坦的石头。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. late Sk. prastara. The ord. meaning of Sk. pr. is “stramentum”] 1. stone, rock S.I,32. -- 2. stoneware Miln.2. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattharati: {'def': '(pa+thar+a), 传开，扩充。【过】patthari。【过分】patthaṭa。【现分】pattharanta。【独】pattharitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+tharati] to spread, spread out, extend J.I,62; IV,212; VI,279; DhA.I,26; III,61 (so read at J.VI,549 in cpd °pāda with spreading feet, v. l. patthaṭa°). -- pp. patthaṭa (q. v.). -- Caus. patthāreti with pp. patthārita probably also to be read at Th.1, 842 for padhārita. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + thar + a), 传开，扩充。【过】 ~thari。【过分】 patthaṭa。【现分】 ~ranta。【独】 ~ritvā。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pattharika: {'def': '[fr. patthara] a merchant Vin.II,135 (kaṁsa°). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patthayati: {'def': '(pa + atth + aya) 想要，需要，热望。【过】 ~thayi。【现分】~yanta。【过分】 patthita。【独】 ~yitvā。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+atth+aya) 想要，需要，热望。【过】patthayi。【现分】patthayanta。【过分】patthita。【独】patthayitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Patthayāna: {'def': '【形】渴望的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】渴望的。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patthaṇḍila: {'def': '[pa+thandila] hermitage M.II,155. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patthaṭa: {'def': '(pattharati 的【过分】), 已传开，大家知道的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pattharati] stretched, spread out J.I,336; Vism.364; DA.I,311. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pattharati 的【过分】), 已传开，大家知道的。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pattheti: {'def': '[pa+arth, cp. Sk. prārthayati] to wish for, desire, pray for, request, long for S.IV,125; V,145; Sn.114, 899; Th.2, 341; Nd¹ 312, 316; PugA 208 (āsaṁsati+); PvA.148; Sdhp.66, 319; ppr. patthento PvA.107; patthayanto J.I,66 (paramâbhisaṁbodhiṁ); patthayaṁ Sn.70 (=icchanto patthayanto abhijappanto Nd² 392); patthayamāna M.I,4; Sn.902; J.I,259; DhA.III,193; PvA.226 (=āsiṁsamāna); & patthayāno Sn.900; It.67, 115. -- grd. patthetabba PvA.96, patthayitabba PvA.95, and patthiya which only occurs in neg. form apatthiya what ought not to be wished J.IV,61; Pv.II,6⁷ (=apatthayitabbaṁ PvA.95); DhA.I,29; also as napatthiya (med.) one who does not wish for himself Sn.914 (cp. Nd² 337). -- pp. patthita (q. v.). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+atth+e), 热望，渴望。【过】patthesi。【过分】patthita。【现分】patthenta。【独】patthetvā。“dibbasampattiṁ patthetvā”ti(热望生天。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + atth + e), 热望，渴望。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~thita。【现分】 ~thenta。【独】 ~thetvā。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patthita: {'def': '[pp. of pattheti] wished for, desired, requested, sought after Sn.836; Miln.227, 361; DhA.IV,201; PvA.47 (°ākāra of the desired kind, as wished for); Sdhp.79 (a°). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patthiva: {'def': '【阳】国王。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】国王。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patthīna: {'def': '[pa+thīna] stiff D.II,335; DhsA.307. Also as patthinna at Vin.I,286 (=atirajitattā thaddha Bdhgh, on p. 391); Vism.361 (=thīna p. 262); VbhA.67 (°sneha). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patti: {'def': '² (f.) [Classical Sk. prāpti fr. pa+āp, cp. patta³] 1. (-°) obtaining, acquiring, getting, entering into, state of S.I,189=Th.1, 1230 (nibbāna°); Sn.68 (paramattha°), 186 (nibbāna°); PvA.5 (vyasana), 112 (id.); Sdhp.379. -- 2. attainment, acquisition S.II,29 (aggassa); Sn.425 (yogakkhemassa); Nd² 390 (=lābhā paṭilābhā adhigamo phusanaṁ sacchikiriyā); esp. in phrase apattassa patti “att^t of the unattained” D.III,255= A.IV,332; S.I,217; II,29; A.II,148; III,179; Kvu 581. ‹-› 3. gaining, gain, profit, advantage S.I,169 (brahma° “best vantage ground”). -- 4. merit, profit, in special sense of a gift given for the benefit of someone else (as a “dakkhiṇǡ”), accrediting, advising, transference of merit, a gift of merit J.II,423, 425 (=dakkhiṇā); IV,21; DhA.I,270 (opp. to mūla price); II,4; IV,200 sq. (opp. to mūla). See also cpds. °dāna & °dhamma. -- 5. that which obtains (as a rule), occasion, happening, state, place, as gram. t. t. Loc. pattiyaṁ or pattiyā (-°) in lieu of SnA 310, 317. -- See sam°.

--dāna an assigned or accredited gift, giving of merit (as permanent acquisition), transference of merit VvA.188, 190; PvA.9 (°vasena dānadhamma-pariccāgo), 49 (=dakkhiṇā) 88 (id.); Sdhp.229. --dhamma the practice of transferred merit, see Kvu trslⁿ 161¹, 170, & cp. pattadhamma. --patta, one who has obtained what can be obtained, or the highest gain (i. e. Nibbāna) Sn.536 (=pattabbaṁ patto pattabbaṁ arahattaṁ patto ti vuttaṁ hoti SnA 433), 537, 540. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Ved. patti, *pad (of pada)+ti] on foot, one who is on foot, a foot-soldier Vin.IV,105 (as one of the 4 constituents of a senā or army, viz. hatthī elephants, assā, horses, rathā chariots, pattī infantry); J.IV,494 (hatthī, assā, rathā, pattī); 463 (hatthī assā rathā, pattī senā padissate mahā); Vism.19. Cp. pattika¹.

--kāya a body of foot soldiers, infantry S.I,72 (cp. BSk. same, at Jtm 215 with hasty-aśva-ratha°). --kārika (for °kārika, of prec.) a foot soldier, lit. one of a body of infantry J.IV,134; V,100; VI,15 (hatthāruhā anīkaṭṭhā rathikā pattikārikā), 21, 463 (hatthī assā rathikā p.). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 步兵。 2. 步兵团。【阴】 3. 抵达。 4. 达到。 5. 功德，利润。6. 分享。 ~ka, 【形】有份的，合伙人。 ~dāna, 【中】回向功德，转让一份。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.步兵。2.步兵团。【阴】3.抵达。4.达到。5.功德，利润。6.分享。pattika,【形】有份的，合夥人。pattidāna,【中】回向功德，转让一份。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ (f.) [for patta¹?] leaf, leafy part of a plant Vin.I,201 (taka, taka-patti, taka-paṇṇi). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattika: {'def': '(= Padika), 【形】走路的。【阳】 1. 行人。 2. 军人走路。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [fr. patti²] having a share, gain or profit; a partner, donor DhA.I,270, 271. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ (adj.-n.) [fr. patta²] in dāru° (collecting alms) with a wooden bowl, man with a wooden bowl D.I,157 (cp. DA.I,319). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(= Padika),【形】走路的。【阳】1.行人。2.军人走路。pattiko upasaṅkamma, 步行往诣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [fr. patti¹ cp. pajja²] on foot, a pedestrian or soldier on foot, D.I,50, 89, 106, 108; II,73; A.II,117 (hatth’--āruha, assāruha, rathika, p.); J.VI,145; Vism.396 (manussā pattikā gacchanti); Sn.418; a form pattikārika is found, e. g. at J.IV, 134; V,100; VI,15, 463; Ap. 316. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. patta¹ or patti³] a leaf, in tāla° palm-leaf S.II,217, 222. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattin: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. patta³, Sk. *prāptin] attaining, one who obtains or gains Sn.513 (kiṁ°=kiṁ patta, adhigata SnA 425). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattiya: {'def': '¹ (adj. n.) [for *pratyaya=paccaya, cp. Trenckner, Notes 7³, 9] believing, trusting, relying J.V,414 (para°); (m.) belief, trust J.V,231 (parapattiyena by relying on others), 233 (id.), 414 (id.). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (adj.) [grd. of pāpuṇāti; cp. pattabba] to be attained, to be shared or profited Pv.II,9³¹ (para° profitable to others, see explⁿ at PvA.125). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattiyāyana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pattiyāyati] belief J.V,402. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattiyāyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. pattiya¹] to believe, trust, rely on J.I,426; V,403; DA.I,73. (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pattuŋ: {'def': '【不】到达，达到，获得。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pattuṁ: {'def': '【不】到达，达到，获得。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pattuṇṇa: {'def': '【中】丝布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】丝布。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pattādhāraka: {'def': '【阳】钵架(钵的架子)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】钵架（钵的架子）。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pattānumodanā: {'def': '【阴】回向功德。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】回向功德。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pattīyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. patti²] to gain, to profit from (Acc.) Miln.240 (attānaṁ na p. does not profit from himself). (Page 407)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patvā: {'def': 'see pāpuṇāti. (Page 408)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pāpuṇāti 的【独】), 到达了，达到了，获得了。appatvā﹐未到达后。pātvākāsi, 到达了，他曾作。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pāpuṇāti 的【独】), 到达了，达到了，获得了。(p200)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Patākā: {'def': '【阴】旗子，旗帜。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】旗子，旗帜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. later Sk. patākā] a flag, banner (cp. dhaja) J.I,52; VvA.31, 173. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patāpa: {'def': '【阳】光彩壮丽，最高权威。 ~vantu, 【形】宏伟的，壮丽的。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】光彩壮丽，最高权威。patāpavantu,【形】宏伟的，壮丽的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+tap] splendour, majesty Vv 40⁸ (=tejas, ānubhāvo VvA.180). (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patāpana: {'def': 'n. 大焦熱 [地獄].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '大焦热地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': 'n. 大焦熱 [地獄].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Patāpavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. patāpa] splendid, majestic Sn.550 (=jutimantatāya p. SnA 453); Th.1, 820. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patāpeti: {'def': '(pa + tap + e), 烧焦，加热。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 patāpita。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+tāpeti, Caus. of tap] scorch, burn fiercely Vv 79⁵ (=ativiya dīpeti VvA.307). Sdhp.573. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+tap(梵tap)热+e), 烧焦，加热。【过】patāpesi。【过分】patāpita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Patāreti: {'def': '[Caus. of patarati] to make go forth, to bring over or through M.I,225; A.III,432 (v. l. M. pakaroti). -- aor. patārayi in meaning “strive” at J.III,210 (=patarati vāyamati C. but Rhys Davids. “to get away from”); as “assert” at J.V,117. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patāyati: {'def': '[in form=pa+tāyati, diff. in meaning; not sufficiently expl^d, see Kern, Toev. p. 29 s. v. It is probably a distorted *sphāṭayati: see under pharati, phalaka and phāteti] to be spread out, intrs. to spread (?) A.IV,97 (kodho p., as if fr. pat); J.III,283 (C. nikkhamati, as if fr. tṛ, Kern. trsl^s “to be for sale”). (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patīci: {'def': '【阴】西部。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】西部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Patīta: {'def': '【形】欢欣的。Patīteti tuṭṭhe.(欢欣的︰已满足的)。Patīteti somanassajāte.(欢欣的︰生喜)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】欣喜的。(p199)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of pacceti] pleased, delighted Dh.68; Sn.379, 679; Vv 84¹⁰ (=pahaṭṭha VvA.337). -- neg. appatīta displeased M.I,27; J.V,103 (v. l. appatika, C expl^ns by assāmika, i. e. without husband). (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Patīyati: {'def': 'see patati. (Page 406)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavacchati: {'def': '[Sk. prayacchati] see anu°, & cp. pavecchati. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavadati: {'def': '[pa+vad] to speak out, speak to, talk, dispute; ppr. pavadanto S.I,42 (trsl. “predicate”); Nd¹ 293. -- aor. pāvādi ThA.71. -- Cp. pāvadati. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavajati: {'def': '[pa+vraj] to wander forth, go about, perambulate; ppr. pavajamāna S.I,42 (but may be pavajjamāna “being predicated” in play of word with act. pavadanto in same verse). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavajjana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pavajjati, Pass. of pavadati] sounding, playing of music VvA.210. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavajjati: {'def': '[Pass. of pavadati] to sound forth to be played (of music) J.I,64 (pavajjayiṁsu, 3^rd pl. aor.); VvA.96 (pavajjamāna ppr. med.). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavakkhati: {'def': '(pavadati 的【未】), 他将会看得出。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pavadati 的【未】), 他将会看得出。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fut. of pa+vac] only in 1^st sq. pavakkhāmi “I will declare or explain” Sn.701, 963=1050 (cp. Nd¹ 482 & Nd² under brūmi). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavana: {'def': '² (nt.) [cp. Vedic pravaṇa; not with Müller, P.Gr. 24=upavana; perhaps=Lat. pronus “prone”] side of a mountain, declivity D.II,254; M.I,117; S.I,26; II,95, 105; Th.1, 1092; J.I,28; II,180; VI,513; Cp. I.1⁵, 10¹; III,13¹; Miln.91, 198 sq., 364, 408; Vism.345. Cp. Pavananagara SnA 583 (v. l. BB for Tumbavanagara=Vanasavhaya). Note. Kern, Toev. s. v. defends Müller’s (after Subhūti) interpretation as “wood, woodland,” and compares BSk. pavana MVastu II.272, 382. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】风。【中】大森林。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ at Vin.II,136 in cpd. pavan-anta refers to the end of the girdle (kāyabandhana), where it is tied into a loop or knot. Bdhgh on p. 319 (on C.V, V,29, 2) expl^s it by pās’anta. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】风。【中】大森林。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Sk. pavana & pāvana, of pū] winnowing of grain Miln.201 (read pavanena ṭṭhāyiko who earned his living by winnowing gṛain). (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavapati: {'def': '[pa+vap] to sow out Th.2, 112. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavara: {'def': '(adj.) [pa+vara] most excellent, noble, distinguished S.III,264; Sn.83, 646, 698 (muni°); Dh.422; Pug.69; Miln.246; PvA.2 (°dhamma-cakka), 67 (id.), 39 (°buddh’āsana); Sdhp.421. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】贵族，优良的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】贵族，优良的。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavasati: {'def': '(pa+vas住+a), 在国外居住，远离家。【过】pavasi。【过分】pavuttha。【独】pavasitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+vas] to “live forth,” i. e. to be away from home, to dwell abroad Sn.899; J.II,123 (=pavasaṁ gacchati); V,91. -- pp. pavuttha (q. v.). Cp. vi°. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + vas + a), 在国外居住，远离家。【过】 pavasi。【过分】pavuttha。【独】 ~sitvā。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavassana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+vṛṣ] beginning to rain, raining Miln.120. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】下雨。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】下雨。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】